EP1141011A2 - Composes et procedes destines a inhiber ou renforcer une reaction inflammatoire - Google Patents

Composes et procedes destines a inhiber ou renforcer une reaction inflammatoire

Info

Publication number
EP1141011A2
EP1141011A2 EP00904325A EP00904325A EP1141011A2 EP 1141011 A2 EP1141011 A2 EP 1141011A2 EP 00904325 A EP00904325 A EP 00904325A EP 00904325 A EP00904325 A EP 00904325A EP 1141011 A2 EP1141011 A2 EP 1141011A2
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
compound
formula
chemokine
xii
xix
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
EP00904325A
Other languages
German (de)
English (en)
Inventor
David J. Grainger
Lauren Marie Tatalick
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Cambridge Enterprise Ltd
Original Assignee
Poniard Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/452,406 external-priority patent/US7238711B1/en
Application filed by Poniard Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Poniard Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority to EP10012546.7A priority Critical patent/EP2386565A3/fr
Publication of EP1141011A2 publication Critical patent/EP1141011A2/fr
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D457/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing indolo [4, 3-f, g] quinoline ring systems, e.g. derivatives of ergoline, of the formula:, e.g. lysergic acid
    • C07D457/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing indolo [4, 3-f, g] quinoline ring systems, e.g. derivatives of ergoline, of the formula:, e.g. lysergic acid with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached in position 8
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/4353—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic ring systems
    • A61K31/4375—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom ortho- or peri-condensed with heterocyclic ring systems the heterocyclic ring system containing a six-membered ring having nitrogen as a ring heteroatom, e.g. quinolizines, naphthyridines, berberine, vincamine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/445—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine
    • A61K31/45—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine having oxo groups directly attached to the heterocyclic ring, e.g. cycloheximide
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/47—Quinolines; Isoquinolines
    • A61K31/472—Non-condensed isoquinolines, e.g. papaverine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/47—Quinolines; Isoquinolines
    • A61K31/475—Quinolines; Isoquinolines having an indole ring, e.g. yohimbine, reserpine, strychnine, vinblastine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/495—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with two or more nitrogen atoms as the only ring heteroatoms, e.g. piperazine or tetrazines
    • A61K31/505—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim
    • A61K31/513—Pyrimidines; Hydrogenated pyrimidines, e.g. trimethoprim having oxo groups directly attached to the heterocyclic ring, e.g. cytosine
    • A61K31/515—Barbituric acids; Derivatives thereof, e.g. sodium pentobarbital
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6891—Pre-targeting systems involving an antibody for targeting specific cells
    • A61K47/6897—Pre-targeting systems with two or three steps using antibody conjugates; Ligand-antiligand therapies
    • A61K47/6898—Pre-targeting systems with two or three steps using antibody conjugates; Ligand-antiligand therapies using avidin- or biotin-conjugated antibodies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/02—Nasal agents, e.g. decongestants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02—Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18—Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P33/00—Antiparasitic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y5/00—Nanobiotechnology or nanomedicine, e.g. protein engineering or drug delivery
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D211/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D211/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D211/80—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D211/84—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D211/86—Oxygen atoms
    • C07D211/88—Oxygen atoms attached in positions 2 and 6, e.g. glutarimide
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D457/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing indolo [4, 3-f, g] quinoline ring systems, e.g. derivatives of ergoline, of the formula:, e.g. lysergic acid
    • C07D457/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing indolo [4, 3-f, g] quinoline ring systems, e.g. derivatives of ergoline, of the formula:, e.g. lysergic acid with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached in position 8
    • C07D457/06—Lysergic acid amides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D459/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing benz [g] indolo [2, 3-a] quinolizine ring systems, e.g. yohimbine; 16, 18-lactones thereof, e.g. reserpic acid lactone
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/52—Cytokines; Lymphokines; Interferons
    • C07K14/521—Chemokines
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/68—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
    • G01N33/6863—Cytokines, i.e. immune system proteins modifying a biological response such as cell growth proliferation or differentiation, e.g. TNF, CNF, GM-CSF, lymphotoxin, MIF or their receptors
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2500/00—Screening for compounds of potential therapeutic value
    • G01N2500/02—Screening involving studying the effect of compounds C on the interaction between interacting molecules A and B (e.g. A = enzyme and B = substrate for A, or A = receptor and B = ligand for the receptor)
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02A50/00—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE in human health protection, e.g. against extreme weather
    • Y02A50/30—Against vector-borne diseases, e.g. mosquito-borne, fly-borne, tick-borne or waterborne diseases whose impact is exacerbated by climate change

Definitions

  • Macrophage/monocyte recruitment plays a role in the morbidity and mortality of a broad spectrum of diseases, including autoimmune diseases, granulomatous diseases, allergic diseases, infectious diseases, osteoporosis and coronary artery disease.
  • diseases including autoimmune diseases, granulomatous diseases, allergic diseases, infectious diseases, osteoporosis and coronary artery disease.
  • monocytes adhere to the activated endothelium overlying the incipient plaque. Under appropriate conditions, the monocytes then migrate into the developing intima.
  • macrophage In the intima, macrophage accumulate lipoprotein and excrete an excess of proteases relative to protease inhibitors. If the lipoproteins are oxidized, they are toxic to macrophage, which results in macrophage death and an increase in an unstable, necrotic, extracellular lipid pool. An excess of proteases results in loss of extracellular matrix and destabilization of the fibrous plaque. Plaque instability is the acute cause of myocardial infarction.
  • chemokines e.g., monocyte chemoattractant protein- 1 (MCP-1).
  • MCP-1 monocyte chemoattractant protein- 1
  • 5,459,1278 generally disclose analogs of MCP-1 that inhibit the monocyte chemoattractant activity of endogenous MCP-1.
  • Analogs that are effective to inhibit endogenous MCP-1 are disclosed as analogs which are modified at 28-tyrosine, 24-arginine, 3-aspartate and/or in amino acids between residues 2-8 of MCP-1.
  • MCP-1 modified in one or more of the following ways: a) the 28-tyrosine is substituted by aspartate, b) the 24-arginine is substituted by phenylalanine, c) the 3-aspartate is substituted by alanine, and/or d) the 2-8 amino acid sequence is deleted" (col. 1, lines 49-54).
  • MCP-1 ( ⁇ 2-8) The deletion of amino acids 2-8 of MCP-1 results in a polypeptide that is inactive, i.e., MCP-1( ⁇ 2-8) is not a chemoattractant (col. 5, lines 22-23).
  • MCP-1 ( ⁇ 2-8) MCP-1 ( ⁇ 2-8). Recent studies suggest that MCP-1 ( ⁇ 2-8) exhibits a dominant negative effect, i.e., it forms heterodimers with wild-type MCP-1 that cannot elicit a biological effect (Zhang et al., I Biol. Chem.. 2 , 15918 (1994); Zhang et al., Mol. Cell. Biol.. 15, 4851 (1995)). Thus, MCP-1 ( ⁇ 2-8) does not exhibit properties of a classic receptor antagonist. Moreover, MCP-1 ( ⁇ 2-8) is unlikely to be widely useful for inhibition of MCP-1 activity in vivo, as MCP-1 ( ⁇ 2-8) is a large polypeptide with undesirable pharmacodynamic properties.
  • MCP-1 ( ⁇ 2-8) is active as a dominant-negative inhibitor of other chemokines associated with inflammation.
  • agents that inhibit or enhance chemokine-induced macrophage and/or monocyte recruitment and which have desirable pharmacodynamic properties are associated with other cell types.
  • agents that inhibit or enhance chemokine-induced activities of other cell types such as lymphocytes, neutrophils or eosinophils.
  • agents that are pan-selective chemokine inhibitors are pan-selective chemokine inhibitors.
  • the invention provides a therapeutic agent comprising an isolated and purified chemokine peptide, chemokine peptide variant, chemokine analog, or a derivative thereof.
  • the therapeutic agent of the invention inhibits the activity of more than one chemokine, although the agent may not inhibit the activity of all chemokines to the same extent.
  • a preferred therapeutic agent of the invention specifically inhibits the activity of one chemokine to a greater extent than other chemokines.
  • Yet another preferred therapeutic agent of the invention mimics the activity of a chemokine, e.g., it acts as an agonist.
  • therapeutic agents that are chemokine antagonists and agonists are within the scope of the invention.
  • a further preferred therapeutic agent of the invention is an agent that does not inhibit or mimic the activity of a chemokine but binds to or near the receptor for that chemokine, i.e., it is a neutral agent.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention is an isolated and purified CC chemokine peptide 3, e.g., a peptide derived from MCP-1 which corresponds to about residue 46 to about residue 67 of mature MCP-1 ("peptide 3[MCP-1]”), a variant, an analog, or a derivative thereof.
  • chemokine peptide 3, a variant, an analog or a derivative thereof is a chemokine receptor antagonist, although these therapeutic agents may exert their effect by a different mechanism, e.g., by inhibiting the arachidonic acid pathway (e.g., inhibition of leukotriene, thromboxane, or prostaglandin synthesis or stability) or by elevating TGF-beta levels, or by more than one mechanism.
  • arachidonic acid pathway e.g., inhibition of leukotriene, thromboxane, or prostaglandin synthesis or stability
  • a preferred peptide 3 of the invention is a compound of formula (I): [[(X 2 )-(X 3 )-C-(X)-(X 7 )-P] a -[(X 4 )-(Z)-(X 5 )-W-(X 1 )-(X 6) ] b ] c
  • X 2 is E, Q, D, N, L, P, I or M
  • X 3 is I, V, M, A, P, norleucine or L
  • X is A, L, V, M, P, norleucine or I
  • X 4 is K, S, R, Q, N or T
  • Z is Q, K, E, N, R, I, V, M, A, P, norleucine or L
  • X 7 is D or P
  • X 5 is K, E, R, S, Q, D, T, G, H or N
  • X 1 is V, L, M, P, A
  • Yet another preferred peptide 3 of the invention is a compound of formula (II): [[(X 4 )-(Z)-(X 5 )] a -[W-(X')-(X 6 )] b ] c wherein X 4 is K, S or T, wherein Z is Q, K, E or L, wherein X 5 is K, E, R, S or T, wherein X 1 is V or I, wherein X 6 is Q or R, wherein a is 0-6, wherein b is 0-6, and wherein c is 1-6, with the proviso that a and b cannot both be 0.
  • Another preferred peptide 3 of the invention is a compound of formula (II): [[(X 4 )-(Z)-(X 5 )] a -[W-(X')-(X 6 )] b ] c wherein X 4 is K, S or T, wherein Z is Q, K, E or L, wherein
  • X 4 is K, S, R, Q, N or T, wherein Z is Q, K, E, N, R, I, V, M, A, P, norleucine or L
  • X 5 is K, E, R, S, Q, D, T, G, H or N
  • X 1 is V, L, M, P, A, norleucine, or I
  • X 6 is Q, N, K or R, wherein a is 0-6, wherein b is 0-6, and wherein c is 1-6, with the proviso that a and b cannot both be O.
  • a more preferred peptide 3 of the invention is a compound of formula (XIII): (X 8 )-(X)-D-(X 2 )-(X 4 )-(Z)-(X 5 )-W-(X')-Q-(X 7 ) wherein X is A, L, V or I, wherein X 2 is P, G or L, wherein X 4 is K, T, R or N, wherein Z is Q, K, A or L, wherein X 5 is K, E, R, Q or P, wherein X 1 is V, L, A, M, F or I, and wherein X 8 and X 7 are independently C or absent.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention is an isolated and purified CC chemokine peptide 3, e.g., a peptide derived from MCP-1 which corresponds to SEQ ID NO:l ("peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1]”) or SEQ ID NO:7 (“peptide 3(3- 12) [MCP-1]”), a fragment, a variant, an analog, or a derivative thereof.
  • CC chemokine peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1](SEQ ID NO:l) and peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1] are pan-chemokine inhibitors, bioavailable, and have desirable pharmacokinetics.
  • Another preferred CC chemokine peptide 3 of the invention is peptide 3[MIPl ], and more preferably peptide 3(l-12)[MIPl ] which has an amino acid sequence corresponding to SEQ ID NO:42, a variant, an analog, a fragment or a derivative thereof.
  • CC chemokine peptide 3 such as peptide 3(l-12)[MCP-4] (e.g., SEQ ID NO:65), peptide 3(1- 12)[MCP-3](e.g., SEQ ID NO:66), peptide 3(l-12)[MCP-2] (e.g., SEQ ID NO:67), peptide 3(l-12)[eotaxin] (e.g., SEQ ID NO:68), peptide 3(1- 12)[MIPl ⁇ ],(e.g., SEQ ID NO:42), peptide 3(l-12)[MIPl ⁇ ] (e.g., SEQ ID NO:43), peptide 3(l-12)[RANTES](e.g., SEQ ID NO:44), or a fragment thereof.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the invention includes a CXC chemokine peptide 3, a variant, an analog or a derivative thereof.
  • a preferred CXC peptide 3 of the invention is a compound of formula (III):
  • CXC chemokine peptide 3 such as peptide 3(1-12)[IL8] (e.g., SEQ ID NO:40), peptide 3(1- 12)[SDF-l](e.g., SEQ ID NO:38), peptide 3(l-12)[ENA-78](e.g., SEQ ID NO:41), peptide 3(l-12)[GRO ](e.g., SEQ ID NO:72), peptide 3(1-
  • chemokine peptide 3 a variant, an analog or a derivative thereof.
  • a chemokine peptide 3, its variants, analogs or derivatives inhibits the arachidonic acid pathway, e.g., inhibits the synthesis or stability, or binding, of thromboxane, prostaglandin, leukotriene, or any combination thereof.
  • chemokine peptide 3 that is at least a tripeptide, a variant thereof or a derivative thereof.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention is the MCP-1 tripeptide KQK (i.e., peptide 3(9-12)[MCP-l], which specifically inhibits MCP-1, but not MlPl ⁇ , IL8 and SDFl ⁇ , chemokine-induced activity.
  • Other preferred embodiments of the invention include isolated and purified chemokine tripeptides that specifically inhibit IL8, MlPl ⁇ , SDF1, MCP-1, MCP-2, MCP-3, and MlPl ⁇ , e.g., KEN, SEE, KLK, KKE, KER, TQK, and SES, respectively.
  • a further preferred embodiment of the invention is a chemokine peptide 3 tripeptide that inhibits the activity of more than one chemokine, e.g., WNQ or WIQ.
  • a tripeptide of the invention is not RFK.
  • the peptide increases the activation of TGF-betal.
  • a peptide which includes the amino acid sequence KXK is less than about 15, preferably about 10, and more preferably about 8 amino acid residues in length.
  • the peptide is not KKFK or RKPK.
  • a further embodiment of the invention is a peptide which includes a basic amino acid residue followed by phenylalanine followed by another basic residue, wherein the peptide is not RFK, is not KRFK, or does not contain RFK or KRFK.
  • Another preferred peptide of the invention is a compound of formula (VII): (X 1) -(Y)-(K)-(X 2 )-K-(X 3 ) wherein X 2 is V, A, D, E, P, R, C, H, M, F, K, L, N, Q, Y, or I; wherein Y is absent or is an amino acid that is not R or K; and wherein X 1 and X 3 are independently 0-20 amino acid residues or absent.
  • X 2 is F, K, L, N, Q, Y, or I. More preferably, X 2 is F, K, L, N, Q, Y, or I, and Y, X 1 and X 3 are absent.
  • a sequence comparison of the receptor ligand under study from a variety of different species is performed, then the cross-reactivity of the receptor ligand from each species to the human receptor is assessed.
  • the preferred sequence(s) are then obtained from the species which has the least sequence homology to the corresponding human receptor ligand, but which still binds and signals through the human receptor.
  • the sequence of this most divergent but still functional receptor ligand is then aligned with the human sequence in order to identify regions that are conserved.
  • conserved regions represent peptides of the invention useful in the methods of the invention.
  • the process has been applied to identify peptides in human MCP-1 having, for example, antagonists, agonists or neutral properties.
  • Such peptides include, but are not limited to, peptide 3, peptide 2 (described below) and related molecules (see below).
  • Another example is the identification of peptides in the sequence of the cytokine TGF-beta having antagonist, agonist, or neutral receptor binding properties.
  • the amino acid sequence of human TGF-betal was compared to that of Xenopus.
  • Peptides identified by this method include LYIDFRQDLGWKW ("Tl”; SEQ ID NO:l 11); HEPKGYHANFC ("T2"; SEQ ID NO:l 12); VYYVGRK ("T3"; SEQ ID NO: 113) and KVEQLSNMVVKSC (“T4"; SEQ ID NO:l 14).
  • a chemokine peptide variant has at least about 50%, preferably at least about 80%, and more preferably at least about 90% but less than 100%), contiguous amino acid sequence homology or identity to the amino acid sequence of the corresponding native chemokine, e.g., Ser 7 peptide 3(1- 12)[MCP1] (SEQ ID NO:ll) has less than 100% contiguous homology to the corresponding amino acid sequence of MCP-1, i.e., a peptide having SEQ ID NO:l.
  • a preferred peptide 3 variant is Leu 4 Ile ⁇ peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l], i.e., it is a ten amino acid peptide derived from peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] that lacks amino acid residues 1 and 2 of peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1], and which has a leucine rather than alanine at position 4 of peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1], and an isoleucine rather than valine at position eleven of peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1].
  • the invention also provides derivatives of chemokine peptides and peptide variants.
  • a preferred derivative is a cyclic reverse sequence D isomer (CRD) derivative of a chemokine peptide, a variant or an analog thereof of the invention.
  • CRD-Cys ⁇ Leu lenpeptide 3 (3 -12) [MCP-1] are compounds of the invention that are particularly useful in the practice of the methods of the invention, as described hereinbelow.
  • chemokines also provided are certain analogs of chemokines.
  • analogs of chemokine peptide 3, or variants thereof are contemplated.
  • a preferred analog of chemokine peptide 3 is an analog of WIQ, including a compound of formula (IV):
  • a preferred embodiment of a compound of formula (IV) includes a compound of a formula (IV) wherein R 1 is aryl, heteroaryl, coumaryl, or chromanyl. Preferably aryl is phenyl; and heteroaryl is indolyl or pyridinyl.
  • Another preferred embodiment of a compound of formula (IV) includes a compound of a formula (IV) wherein R 2 is N(R a )(R b ); and R 3 is N(R c )(R d ).
  • Yet another preferred embodiment of a compound of formula (IV) includes a compound of a formula (IV) wherein Z is (C,-C ]5 )alkyl.
  • R 1 is aryl, heteroaryl, coumaryl or chromanyl; wherein R 2 is N(R a )(R b ); wherein R 3 is
  • a further preferred compound is a compound of formula (IV) wherein R 1 is indolyl; R 2 is N(R a )(R b ); R 3 is N(R c )(R d ); Y is S; Z is hydrogen; and R a , R b , R c , and R d are each methyl.
  • a further preferred analog of WIQ is a compound of formula (XIV):
  • R [ is O(Ra) wherein Ra is H, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, ( -C ⁇ alkanoyl, (C r C 6 )alkanoyloxy, (C 6 -C 10 )aryl or (C 6 -C 10 )heteroaryl; or N(Rb)(Rc) wherein each Rb and Rc is independently H or (C,-C 6 )alkyl;
  • R 2 is O(Ra) wherein Ra is H, (C r C 6 )alkyl, (C,-C 6 )alkanoyl, (C,-C 6 )alkanoyloxy, (C 6 -C 10 )aryl or (C 6 - C 10 )heteroaryl; or N(Rb)(Rc) wherein each Rb and Rc is independently H or (C,- C 6 )alkyl;
  • R 4 is
  • WIQ is a compound of formula (XIV) wherein R, is 0(1 ⁇ ), an amino acid, or N(R b )(R c ); R 2 is O(RJ or N(R b )(R c ); R 3 is H, oxo or thioxo; R 4 is H, oxo, thioxo, O(RJ or N(R b )(R c ); n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; each R a is independently hydrogen, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C ⁇ C ⁇ alkanoyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or a saccharide; R b and R c are each independently H or (C,-C 6 )alkyl; wherein any (C,-C 6 )alkyl, ( -C ⁇ alkanoyl, (C,-C 6 )alkanoyloxy, aryl or heteroaryl is optionally substituted with one or more
  • substituents selected from the group consisting of halo, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C,-C 6 )alkoxy, (C,-C 6 )alkanoyl, (C,-C 6 )alkanoyloxy, ( -C ⁇ alkoxycarbonyl, hydroxy, oxo, sulfino (SO 2 H), sulfo (SO 3 H), and N(R b )(R c ); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • R can specifically be N(Rb)(Rc) wherein Rb is H and Rc is H;
  • R 2 can specifically be O(Ra) wherein Ra is H, -CH 2 C(OH)C(OH)C(OH)CHO or -CH 2 C(OH)C(OH)C(NH 2 )CHO;
  • R 3 can specifically be H;
  • R 4 can specifically be H; and
  • n can specifically be 1.
  • Specific compounds of formula (XIN) are compounds wherein R, is amino, methylamino, dimethylamino or ⁇ -linked-glutamine;
  • R 2 is hydroxy, R 3 is hydrogen, R 4 is hydrogen, and n is 0 or 1 ; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Other specific compounds of formula (XTV) are compounds wherein the benzo ring of formula (XIV) is optionally substituted.
  • Preferred compounds of formula (XIV) possess the ring stereochemistry of yohimbine, however, the invention also provides compounds of formula (XIV) having the alloyohimbine and the rauwolscine ring systems.
  • the compounds of the invention preferably exclude compounds of formula (XIV) wherein R, is a ⁇ - amino, hydroxy, or methoxy, when n is 0, R 2 is an cc- methoxy, R 3 is hydrogen, and R 4 is hydroxy (Baxter et al., J.Am.Chem.
  • R is a ⁇ - ⁇ (R a ) or N(R b )(R c ) wherein R, is hydrogen or (C r C 6 )alkyl and R b and R c are each hydrogen, when, n is 0, R 2 is an - O(RJ wherein R a is hydrogen, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, or (C,-C 6 )alkanoyl, R 3 is hydrogen, and R 4 is hydrogen (U.S. Patent Number 5,807,482).
  • R is (C,-C I5 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 15 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 15 )alkynyl, (C,-C 15 )alkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, aryl(C,-C 6 )alkyl, heteroaryl(C,-C 6 )alkyl; and R 2 is hydrogen or (C,-C 15 )alkyl; or R, and R 2 together with the atoms to which they are attached are a five or six membered heterocyclic ring comprising four or five carbon atoms, optionally substituted on carbon with oxo, and optionally substituted with a fused benzo group; R 3 is hydroxy, (C j -C ⁇ alkoxy, or ⁇ IL ⁇ R,,); and R 4 is hydroxy, (C,-C 6 )alkoxy, or N(R a )(R b ) ; or R 3 and R 4 together with the
  • R j is 9-decenyl, tert-butoxy, phenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, tert-butylcarbonyl- aminomethyl, benzoylaminomethyl, 4-hydroxybenzyloxycarbonylaminomethyl; and R 2 is hydrogen; or R, and R 2 together with the atoms to which they are attached are 2-(l,3-dioxo-lH-isoindolyl); R 3 is amino or hydroxy; and R 4 is hydroxy, amino, or 4-hydroxybenzylamino; or R 3 and R 4 together with the atoms to which they are attached are a six membered heterocyclic ring comprising five carbon atoms and N(H); R 5 is hydrogen; and R 6 is hydrogen.
  • the center marked * has the (S) absolute configuration in a compound of formula (X).
  • a preferred group of compounds of formula (X) are compounds wherein
  • R 5 is (C,-C 6 )alkyl.
  • A is C(R 2 ) or N;
  • R t is (C,-C 15 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 15 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 15 )alkynyl, (C,-C 15 )alkoxy, (C,-C 15 )alkanoyl, (C 2 -C 15 )alkenylcarbonyl, (C 2 - C 15 )alkynylcarbonyl, (C,-C 15 )alkoxycarbonyl, or N(R a )(R b );
  • R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 are each independently hydrogen, halo, cyano, hydroxy, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C r C 6 )alkoxy, (C,-C 6 )alkanoyl, (C r C 6 )alkanoyloxy, (C,-C 6 )
  • R can specifically be (C 6 -C 15 )alkenyl, (C 6 -C 15 )alkenylcarbonyl, or N(R (R b ), wherein R a is hydrogen and R b is (C 6 - C 15 )alkenyl, or (C 6 -C 15 )alkenylcarbonyl; or R, can specifically be 10- undecenoylamino or 9-decenoyl; R 2 can specifically be hydrogen; R 3 can specifically be sulfo; R 4 can specifically be hydrogen; and R 5 can specifically be hydrogen.
  • An analog of WAQ useful in the methods of the invention is a compound of formula (XII):
  • R is hydrogen or (C,-C 6 )alkyl
  • R 2 is hydrogen, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C,- C 6 )alkanoyl, an amino acid, (amino acid)(C r C 6 )alkyl, (amino acid)(C r C 6 )alkanoyl, or N(R a )(R b ), wherein each R a and R b is independently hydrogen, (C 1 -C 6 )alkanoyl, an amino acid, phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, (C j -C ⁇ alkyl, (C j -C 6 )alkanoyl, phenyl, benzyl, or phenethyl; and the bond represented by — is absent or present; wherein the benz ring of formula (XII) may optionally be substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting
  • a specific compound of formula (XII) is a compound of the following formula:
  • R ⁇ is hydrogen or (C,-C 6 )alkyl; and R,, is hydrogen or an amino acid; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • R can specifically be methyl or ethyl; and R 2 can specifically be glutamine linked through the amine nitrogen to form an amide.
  • Specific compounds of formula (XII) are compounds wherein the carbon bearing R 2 has the R absolute configuration, however, the invention also provides the corresponding compounds of the S absolute configuration.
  • R is (C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C,-C 6 )alkanoyl, aryl, heteroaryl, (C C 6 )alkoxycarbonyl, or benzyloxycarbonyl, wherein aryl, heteroaryl, and the phenyl ring of the benzyloxycarbonyl can optionally be substituted with one or more (e.g.
  • R' is (C ! -C 6 )alkoxy, aryloxy, or and R b are each independently hydrogen, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, aryl, benzyl, or phenethyl; or R.., and R,, together with the nitrogen to which they are attached are a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring (e.g. pyrrolidino, piperidino, or morpholino); and each R" is independently hydrogen, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, or phenethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • R is benzyloxycarbonyl and R' is dimethyl amino or diethylamine, or R is benzyloxycarbonyl; and R' is benzyloxy.
  • R is (C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C r C 6 )alkanoyl, aryl, heteroaryl, (C r C 6 )alkoxycarbonyl, or benzyloxycarbonyl, wherein aryl, heteroaryl, and the phenyl ring of the benzyloxycarbonyl can optionally be substituted with one or more (e.g.
  • R' is (C,-C 6 )alkoxy, aryloxy, or NR a R b , wherein R a and R b are each independently hydrogen, (C r C 6 )alkyl, aryl, benzyl, or phenethyl; or R a , and R b together with the nitrogen to which they are attached are a 5-6 membered heterocyclic ring (e.g. pyrrolidino, piperidino, or morpholino); and each R" is independently hydrogen, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, phenyl, benzyl, or phenethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • R is benzyloxycarbonyl and R' is dimethyl amino or diethylamine, or R is benzyloxycarbonyl; and R' is benzyloxy.
  • chemokine peptide 3 is an analog of KXK.
  • the invention includes a compound of formula (V):
  • R are each independently hydrogen, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 - C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C,-C 6 )alkyl, phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • R k , R,, R 0 , and R p are each hydrogen;
  • R,,, are R, are each independently hydrogen, acetyl, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, propoxy, butoxy, tert-butoxycarbonyl, 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl or the C-terminal residue of an amino acid or a peptide of 2 to about 25 amino acid residues;
  • R q are IC are each independently hydrogen, (C,-C I0 )alkyl, or (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl.
  • R 7 is methyl, 3-guanidinopropyl, aminocarbonylmethyl, carboxymethyl, mercaptomethyl, (2-carboxyl-2-aminoethyl)dithiomethyl, 2- carboxyethyl, 2-(aminocarbonyl)ethyl, hydrogen, 5-imadazoylmethyl, 4-amino- 3-hydroxy propyl, 2-butyl, 2-methylprop-l-yl, 4-amino butyl, 2- (methylthio)ethyl, benzyl, hydroxy methyl, 1-hydroxyethyl, 3-indolylmethyl, 4- hydroxybenzyl, or isopropyl.
  • R 7 is hydrogen, benzyl, 4-hydroxybenzyl, methyl, 2- hydroxy methyl, or mercaptomethyl.
  • a preferred compound of formula (V) includes an analog of KGK, KFK, KYK, KAK, KSK, KCK or KQK.
  • an analog of KQK includes a compound of formula (V): wherein R 4 is NR j R,; R 5 is NR C-; R 6 is NR ⁇ ; R 7 is NR q R-.; R 8 is hydrogen, hydroxy, (C r C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C r C 10 )alkoxy, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C,-C 6 )alkoxy, NR.R,, the amino terminus of an amino acid or the N-terminal residue of a peptide of 2 to about 25 amino acid residues; R k , R,, R 0 , and R p are each independently hydrogen, (C 1
  • R are each independently hydrogen, (C j -C ⁇ alkyl, (C 3 - C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C,-C 6 )alkyl, phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl; R,. are R, are each independently hydrogen, (C r C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 - C 6 )cycloalkyl(C ! -C 6 )alkyl, phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • R k , R,, R 0 , and R p are each hydrogen; ⁇ are R, are each independently hydrogen, acetyl, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, propoxy, butoxy, tert-butoxycarbonyl, 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl or the C-terminal residue of an amino acid or a peptide of 2 to about 25 amino acid residues; and R q are R,. are each independently hydrogen, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, or (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl.
  • Another preferred analog of chemokine peptide 3 is an analog of WVQ.
  • the invention provides a compound of formula (VI):
  • R 10 is NR'R;
  • R 10 is amino;
  • R 11 is 2-benzimidazolyl;
  • R 12 is (C,-C 6 )alkyl;
  • R 13 is hydroxy; and
  • R 14 is amino.
  • R 10 is NR'R
  • R 12 is (C,-C 6 )alkyl
  • R 13 is (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C,-C 10 )alkoxy, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C r C 6 )alkoxy, hydroxy, or N(R a )(R b );
  • R 14 is (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C r C 6 )alkyl, (C r C 10 )alkoxy, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C r C 6 )alkoxy or N(R c )(R d );
  • Y is oxo or thioxo; wherein R a -R J are each independently hydrogen, (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl, (C r C 10 )alkanoyl, phenyl, benzyl, or phenethyl; or R a and R b , R c and R d , R e and R f , R s and R h ' or R 1 and R j together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a ring selected from pyrrolidino, piperidino,
  • chemokine peptide 3 is an analog of WGQ.
  • the invention provides a compound of formula (XV):
  • R is aryl, heteroaryl, aryl(C,-C 10 )alkyl, aryl(C,-C 10 )alkanoyl, heteroaryl(C,-C 10 )alkyl, or heteroaryl(C,-C 10 )alkanoyl;
  • R 2 is hydrogen, (C r C ⁇ 5 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 8 )cycloalkyl(C r C 10 )alkyl, aryl, or aryl(C r C I0 )alkyl;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, or (C r C ⁇ 0 )alkyl,
  • R 4 is hydrogen, or (C,-C l0 )alkyl;
  • R 5 is N(R a )(R b );
  • R 6 is N(R a )(R b ); and each R a and R b is independently hydrogen, (C,-
  • R can specifically be 3-indolylmethyl;
  • R 2 can specifically be isopropyl, tert-butyl, or phenyl;
  • R 3 can specifically be methyl;
  • R 4 can specifically be hydrogen;
  • R 5 can specifically be amino;
  • R 6 can specifically be dimethylamino, benzylamino, or hydroxybenzylamino.
  • R is (C 7 -C 15 )alkyl, (C 7 -C 15 )alkenyl, (C 7 -C, 5 )alkynyl, (C 7 -C 15 )alkoxy, aryl(C 5 -C 10 )alkyl, or heteroaryl(C 5 -C 10 )alkyl;
  • R 2 is hydrogen or (C 1 -C 15 )alkyl;
  • R 3 is hydroxy, (C,-C 6 )alkoxy, or N(RJ(R b ) , wherein each R ⁇ and R b is independently hydrogen, (C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C,-C 6 )alkanoyl, (C,-C 6 )alkoxycarbonyl, aryl, aryl(C C 6 )alkyl, aryl(C,-C 6 )alkoxy, aryl(C C 6 )alkanoyl, ary ⁇ C,- C 6
  • a preferred group of compounds of formula (XIX) are compounds wherein R, is 9-decenyl, R 2 is hydrogen, and R 3 is hydroxy, amino, or methoxy.
  • a more preferred compound of formula (XIX) is a compound wherein R ⁇ is 9- decenyl, R 2 is hydrogen, and R 3 is amino; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention include compounds having a chiral center that can be isolated in optically active and racemic forms. Also provided are pharmaceutical compositions, delivery systems, and kits comprising the therapeutic agents of the invention.
  • the invention further provides methods to treat chemokine-associated indications.
  • the invention provides a method of preventing or inhibiting an indication associated with chemokine-induced activity.
  • the method comprises administering to a mammal afflicted with, or at risk of, the indication an amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a fragment thereof, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof, effective to prevent or inhibit said activity.
  • the peptide is not an IL-8 peptide, a NAP-2 peptide, or a PF4 peptide.
  • the administration is effective to inhibit the activity of more than one chemokine (i.e., the peptide is a pan-selective inhibitor).
  • Preferred pan-chemokine inhibitors are analogs of WVQ, e.g., YII (see page 54), analogs of WIQ, analogs of WGQ, e.g., All (see page 56), Leu 4 Ile u peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1], Leu l ⁇ npeptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] and CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile, peptide 3(3-12).
  • WVQ e.g., YII
  • analogs of WIQ analogs of WGQ
  • All see page 56
  • Leu l ⁇ npeptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] and CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile, peptide 3(3-12).
  • These agents are useful to treat indications such as multiple sclerosis, asthma, psoriasis, allergy, rheumatoid arthritis
  • Preferred chemokine peptides useful to treat or inhibit these indications include peptide 2 and/or peptide 3 from MCP-1, MCP-2, MCP- 3, MCP-4, RANTES, MlPl ⁇ , ENA78, MIG, GRO , GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , GCP-1, HCC-1, 1-309, SCM-1, eotaxin, IP10, MlP ⁇ and SDF-1.
  • peptide 3 may decrease Th2 responses and increase Thl responses
  • these compounds may be particularly useful to treat or prevent specific diseases in which a decrease in Th2 response and an increase in Thl response is indicated.
  • the invention also provides a method of preventing or inhibiting an indication associated with histamine release from basophils or mast cells.
  • the method comprises administering to a mammal at risk of, or afflicted with, the indication an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • a method of preventing or inhibiting an indication associated with monocyte, macrophage, neutrophil, B cell, T cell or eosinophil recruitment, or B cell or T cell activation or proliferation comprises administering an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XTV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, or a derivative thereof may be useful to prevent or treat autoimmune or granulomatous indications.
  • a therapeutic method to prevent or treat vascular indications comprising: administering to a mammal in need of such therapy an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof, wherein the indication is coronary artery disease, myocardial infarction, unstable angina pectoris, atherosclerosis or vasculitis, e.g., Behcet's syndrome, giant cell arteritis, polymyalgia rheumatica, Wegener's granulomatosis, Churg-Strauss
  • Preferred chemokine peptides for this embodiment of the invention include chemokine peptides of MCP-1, RANTES, GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , GCP-1, HCC- 1, 1-309, SCM-1, MlPl ⁇ , IP10, MCP-4, and MlPl ⁇ .
  • the invention also provides a method to prevent or treat an autoimmune disorder.
  • the method comprises administering to a mammal in need of said therapy an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • a preferred variant of peptide 3 useful to prevent or treat autoimmune disorders is Leu 4 --le, , peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:14) or peptide 3 having WVQ.
  • a preferred chemokine peptide 3 for use in preventing or treating multiple sclerosis includes SEE and peptide 3(l-14)[MIPl ⁇ ] (SEQ ID NO:42).
  • Other preferred peptides are chemokine peptides of RANTES.
  • a method to modulate the chemokine-induced activity of macrophage, B cells, T cells or other hematopoietic cells, e.g., neutrophils, eosinophils or mast cells, at a preselected physiological site is provided.
  • the method comprises administering a dosage form comprising an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof, wherein the dosage form is linked, either covalently or noncovalently, to a targeting moiety.
  • the targeting moiety binds to a cellular component at the preselected physiological site, e.g., to an antigen that is specific for tumor cells.
  • an agent of the invention may be a targeting moiety, as some of the agents are selective chemokine inhibitors, rather than pan-chemokine inhibitors.
  • an agent of the invention e.g., peptide 3
  • an agent of the invention may be useful in the targeted delivery of an isotope or other cytotoxic molecule to certain cells.
  • an agent of the invention that specifically targets a particular cell type may be useful in diagnostics.
  • these agents can be radiolabeled (Chianelli et al., Nucl. Meri. Comm..
  • any other detectable signal such as those useful in diagnostic imaging (e.g., MRI and CAT) to image sites of inflammation in disorders like rheumatoid arthritis and diabetes mellitus (type I).
  • diagnostic imaging e.g., MRI and CAT
  • type I rheumatoid arthritis and diabetes mellitus
  • the invention also provides a therapeutic method to prevent or inhibit asthma.
  • the method comprises administering to a mammal in need of such therapy an effective amount of an agent that inhibits airway reactivity and a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • a peptide of the invention inhibited cellular inflammation and IgE responses in the lung of mice exposed to ovalbumin.
  • a therapeutic agent is administered to the upper and/or lower respiratory tract.
  • Preferred peptides useful in this embodiment of the invention are chemokine peptides of RANTES, MCP-1 and MlPl ⁇ .
  • a therapeutic method to prevent or inhibit viral e.g., poxvirus, he ⁇ esvirus (e.g., Herpesvirus samiri), cytomegalovirus (CMV) or lentivirus, infection or replication.
  • viral e.g., poxvirus, he ⁇ esvirus (e.g., Herpesvirus samiri), cytomegalovirus (CMV) or lentivirus, infection or replication.
  • the method comprises administering to a mammal in need of such therapy an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), or a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • the therapeutic agents are employed to prevent or treat HIV.
  • the agent is administered before, during or after the administration of an anti-viral agent, e.g., for HIV AZT, a non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a protease inhibitor or a combination thereof.
  • an anti-viral agent e.g., for HIV AZT, a non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a protease inhibitor or a combination thereof.
  • a combination of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), or a compound of formula (XIX) may be useful in the anti-viral methods and compositions of the invention.
  • Preferred chemokine peptides useful to prevent or inhibit viral infection are those from IP10, MlPl ⁇ , MlPl ⁇ , SDF-1, IL-8, GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , GCP-1, HCC-1, 1-309, SCM-1, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • a therapeutic method to prevent or treat low bone mineral density comprises administering to a mammal in need of such therapy an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • a preferred derivative of a variant of peptide 3 to prevent or treat low mineral bone density is CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile u peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • a preferred fragment of SEQ ID NO: 1 useful in preventing or treating low mineral bone density is KQK.
  • Also provided is a method of suppressing tumor growth in a vertebrate animal comprising administering to said vertebrate a therapeutically effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • the method increases or enhances macrophage, B cell-, T cell- or other immune cell-associated activity at a tumor site.
  • a preferred peptide for use in this embodiment of the invention is a MCP-1 peptide.
  • a method for preventing or treating rheumatoid arthritis in a mammal comprising: administering to the mammal an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • a preferred peptide is a MCP-1, MlPl ⁇ , MlPl ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , and ENA78 peptide.
  • a method to prevent or treat organ transplant rejection, and/or delayed organ or graft function comprises administering an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • a method for preventing or treating psoriasis in a mammal comprising: administering to the mammal an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • Preferred peptides to prevent or treat psoriasis are peptides of MCP-1, RANTES, MlPl ⁇ , MIG, IP10, GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , GCP-1, HCC-1, 1-309, SCM-1, or MCP-3.
  • a preferred derivative to prevent or treat psoriasis is a CRD-derivative of peptide 3. Also provided is a method to enhance wound healing.
  • the method comprises administering to a mammal an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIN), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • the invention also provides a method to modulate a chemokine-induced activity, e.g., to treat malaria, tuberculosis or other disorders caused by intracellular parasites.
  • the method comprises administering to a mammal an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • a method for preventing or treating an allergy in a mammal comprising: administering to the mammal an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • Preferred peptides to prevent or treat allergies include peptides of RA ⁇ TES, MlPl ⁇ , MCP-1, MCP-2, MCP-3, MCP-4, eotaxin or MlPl ⁇ .
  • Yet another embodiment of the invention is a method to prevent or inhibit an indication associated with elevated T ⁇ F- ⁇ .
  • the method comprises administering an effective amount of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (VII), a compound of formula (VIII), a compound of formula (IX) a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (XV), a compound of formula (XIX), or a combination thereof.
  • the invention also provides methods in which the nucleic acid molecules of the invention are administered to a mammal afflicted with, or at risk of, an indication associated with a chemokine-induced activity.
  • the invention also provides a method to identify a region of a chemokine receptor which binds to a chemokine peptide, a variant, derivative or analog thereof.
  • the method comprises contacting a chemokine receptor with an amount of the chemokine peptide, a variant, derivative or analog thereof so as to result in a complex between the receptor and the chemokine peptide, a variant, derivative or analog thereof. Then it is determined which region of the receptor is bound to the chemokine peptide, variant, derivative or analog thereof.
  • the invention further provides a method to identify a molecule which binds to a region of a chemokine receptor that is bound by a specific chemokine peptide, a variant, derivative or analog thereof.
  • the method contacting the region with a population of molecules, and detecting or determining whether at least one molecule of the population of molecules specifically binds to the region.
  • Yet another embodiment of the invention is a method to identify a molecule that binds to a chemokine receptor but which molecule does not form a heterodimer with at least one chemokine that binds to the receptor.
  • the method comprises contacting the chemokine receptor with the molecule so as to form a complex between the receptor and the molecule.
  • the complex is contacted with at least one chemokine. Then it is determined whether the molecule in the complex forms a heterodimer with the chemokine.
  • a further embodiment of the invention also is a method to identify a molecule that binds to a chemokine receptor but which molecule does not form a heterodimer with a chemokine that binds to the receptor.
  • the method comprises contacting the chemokine receptor with the molecule and at least one chemokine, and detecting or determining whether the molecule forms a heterodimer with the chemokine.
  • the invention also provides a method to identify an agent that inhibits antigen-induced recall response.
  • the method comprises administering to a mammal which is sensitized to an antigen an agent selected from 1) a compound of formula (XIV), (X), (XI), or (XII); or 2) a saccharide conjugate of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), or a compound of formula (XIX); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or a combination thereof. It is then determined whether the agent inhibits the recall response.
  • an agent selected from 1) a compound of formula (XIV), (X), (XI), or (XII); or 2) a saccharide conjugate of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound
  • the invention further provides a method of preventing or inhibiting a recall response to an antigen, comprising: administering to a mammal which is sensitized to the antigen an amount of an agent effective to inhibit or decrease IL-4 levels in the mammal or to inhibit or decrease immunoglobulin levels in the mammal; wherein the agent is selected from: 1) a compound of formula (XIN), (X), (XI), (XIX), or (XII); and 2) a saccharide conjugate of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), or a compound of formula (XIX); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or a combination thereof.
  • the agent is selected from: 1) a compound of formula (XIN), (X), (XI),
  • Yet a further embodiment of the invention is a method of suppressing the immune response of a mammal subjected to a therapy which employs an immunogenic therapeutic molecule, comprising: administering to the mammal an amount of an agent effective to inhibit antigen- induced recall response to the immunogenic therapeutic molecule; wherein the agent is selected from: 1) a compound of formula (XIV), (X), (XI), (XIX), and (XII); and 2) a saccharide conjugate of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), or a compound of formula (XIX); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or a combination thereof.
  • the agent is selected from: 1) a compound of formula (XIV), (X), (XI), (XI
  • the invention also provides a method to identify an agent which inhibits chemokine activity but does not compete with native chemokine for its receptor.
  • the method comprises contacting cells with the agent, wherein the cells comprise receptors that bind native chemokine; and detecting or determining whether the agent specifically binds to a receptor which is not the receptor which binds native chemokine and inhibits chemokine activity.
  • the invention also provides a method to prevent or inhibit stroke, comprising: administering to a mammal an effective amount of: 1) a compound of formula (XIV), (X), (XI), (XIX), or (XII); or 2) a saccharide conjugate of a chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XII), a compound of formula (XIV), or a compound of formula (XIX); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; or a combination thereof.
  • the invention further provides a method to increased in vivo half-life of compound selected from chemokine peptide 3, a variant thereof, a derivative thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XIX), and a compound of formula (XII), comprising linking a saccharide to the compound.
  • the invention also provides a saccharide linked compound prepared by the above method.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic of the trans- well migration assay.
  • the peptide (wavy line) is added to the upper well with about 50,000 cells (O).
  • the upper and lower wells are separated by a 5 ⁇ m or 8 ⁇ m pore size PVP-free membrane ( ).
  • Chemokine (•) is added to the lower well. After 4 hours, the number of cells that have migrated through the membrane are measured (O in lower well).
  • Figure 2 shows a dose-response curve for the peptide 3 (SEQ ID NO: 1) inhibition of MCP-1-induced THP-1 cell migration.
  • Figure 3 shows the structure of CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile n peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1], which is cyclized via disulphide bonds.
  • the main chain ⁇ carbons are indicated by C D which indicates that the D form of the amino acid is present.
  • Figure 4 depicts a schematic of inhibition of cell migration by a therapeutic agent of the invention, e.g., by inhibiting the functional activity induced by the binding of native chemokine to its chemokine receptor.
  • C R C a therapeutic agent of the invention.
  • Chemokine receptors are shown as blackened rectangles.
  • Figure 6 shows an analog of peptide WVQ.
  • Figure 7A shows a graph of the percent fractional area staining for macrophage at the site of MCP-1 administration in a rat in the presence or absence of a peptide of the invention.
  • Figure 7B shows a graph of the percent fractional area staining for B cells at the site of LPS and MCP-1 administration in a rat in the presence or absence of a peptide of the invention.
  • Figure 8 depicts codons for various amino acids.
  • Figure 9 depicts exemplary amino acid substitutions.
  • Figure 10 shows exemplary therapeutic agents of the invention.
  • Figure 11 summarizes binding and ED 50 data for selected peptides of the invention.
  • Figure 13 depicts the structure and ED 50 of CRD derivatives of peptide 3, CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile u peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] and the D-ala derivative thereof ("inactive").
  • Figure 14 shows the inhibition of monocyte infiltration induced by MCP- 1 in rat skin by CRD-CyS ⁇ 3 Leu 4 Ile n peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] in contrast to the D- ala derivative thereof ("inactive").
  • Figure 15 depicts the inhibition of neutrophils, monocytes and lymphocytes, and the reduction in TNF- ⁇ levels, in the skin of rats exposed to LPS in the presence of CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile, peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Inactive the D-ala derivative of CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile reliepeptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Figure 16 shows the results from ovalbumin-sensitized mice treated with an agent of the invention.
  • A IgE, IL-4, total cells, and macrophages in ovalbumin-sensitized mice treated with two different amounts of CRD- Leu 4 Ile,,Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • B Results from FACS analysis of ovalbumin-sensitized mice treated with CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1].
  • mice treated with CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] There were significantly lower numbers of macrophages in the lungs of mice treated with CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] as compared to mice that received only PBS prior to ovalbumin challenge.
  • C Serum IgE and IL-4 levels from ovalbumin-sensitized mice treated with CRD- Leu 4 Ile u Cys I3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l]. Serum IgE and IL-4 levels were significantly lower in mice treated with CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1] than in mice that received only PBS prior to ovalbumin challenge.
  • Figure 17 is a graph of results obtained in the THP-1 migration assay with 100 ⁇ M peptide.
  • 3.14.3 is CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile, peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l], 3.14.5 is L-Leu 4 CRD-Cys 13 Ile n peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l], 3.14.6 is CRD- Ty ⁇ Leu len ⁇ -Ala j ⁇ Ala ⁇ eptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] (N-terminal extension), 3.14.7 is CRD-Leu 4 Asn 5 Ile pain ⁇ -Ala 3 ⁇ Ala 4 Tyr 15 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] (C-terminal extension), 3.3.0 is peptide 3(7-12)[MCP-l], 3.19.2 is LRD-peptide 3(7-
  • Figure 18 depicts exemplary agents of the invention.
  • Figure 19 shows the ED 50 for the inhibition of THP-1 migration in a transwell assay induced by either 50 ng/ml MCP- 1 , 100 ng/ml IL-8 or 100 nM fMLP by agents of the invention.
  • Peptides 1 and 2 had no significant effect on THP-1 migration induced by either CC or CXC chemokines even at 100 ⁇ M.
  • the ED 50 for peptide 3 and its variants shown are the mean ⁇ SEM of three separate experiments. All the variants inhibited migration in response to both CC and CXC chemokines by more than 90% at 100 ⁇ M demonstrating that peptide 3 and its derivatives are pan-chemokine inhibitors.
  • fMLP fMet-Leu-Phe
  • TGF- ⁇ l 100 ⁇ M (the highest concentration tested).
  • the peptides exhibit similar properties to other CC and CXC chemokines (MlP-l ⁇ and SDF-l ⁇ ).
  • Figure 20 shows the inhibition of MCP-1 induced migration by peptide 3 and biotinylated peptide 3.
  • Figure 21 shows a graph of the inhibition of binding of biotinylated mouse IgG by increasing amounts of labeled peptide 2 and 3.
  • Figure 22 A depicts the equilibrium binding of RANTES to various cells.
  • Figure 22B shows a comparison between the binding of labeled RANTES to various cells in the presence or absence of unlabeled RANTES.
  • Figure 23 depicts FITC-anti-CCR5 antibody staining of CCR5 expressing cells.
  • Figure 24 depicts FITC-anti-CXCRl antibody and FITC-anti-CXCR2 antibody staining of CXCR1 and CXCR2 expressing cells, respectively.
  • Figure 25 shows peptide 2 and 3 binding to parent and recombinant chemokine receptor expressing cell lines.
  • Figure 26 A shows a bar graph of the binding of biotinylated peptide 3 to THP-1 cells using 125 I-streptavidin.
  • Figure 26B shows a dose-response curve for binding of biotinylated peptide 3 to THP-1 cells using 35 S-streptavidin.
  • Figure 27 shows total cell number and cell types in the lung of unchallenged and ovalbumin-challenged mice administered CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Figure 28 shows IgE levels in unchallenged and ovalbumin-challenged mice administered CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys I3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Figure 29 shows IgE and total IgM and IgG in spleen recall responses in unchallenged and ovalbumin-challenged mice administered CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys I3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Figure 30 depicts IL-4 levels in spleen recall responses from unchallenged and ovalbumin-challenged mice administered CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Figure 31 shows total cells in the lung of unchallenged and ovalbumin- challenged mice.
  • Figure 32 depicts IgE in spleen recall responses of unchallenged and ovalbumin-challenged mice.
  • Figure 33 depicts antibody-specific recall responses in monkeys treated with CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Animals #137 and #144 were diluent (PBS) controls.
  • Animals #138, #141 and #143 were treated with CRD- Leu 4 Ile n Cys I3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Figure 35 shows intracellular calcium influx in THP-1 cells loaded with Fura2.
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys I3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] at 6.7 ⁇ g/ml was incubated with THP-1 cells (2 x 10 6 cells/ml) for 25 minutes prior to exposure to agonist (10 ng/ml) and measurement of flux. The second exposure to agonist is 2 minutes later. Fluorescence is measured at 510 nm.
  • Figure 36 depicts the inhibition of T cell-dependent antibody response in mice by CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Figure 37 depicts results from male and female, i.v. cannulated, Sprague
  • Figure 38 shows whole blood clearance over time after a single subcutaneous bolus dose of either 10.3, 103 or 1030 ⁇ g 3 H-CRD-L- Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l]. Values are represented as % of the injected dose per gram of blood.
  • Figure 39 shows the biodistribution of 3 H-CRD-L-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide
  • Figures 40A-C show the total cells, macrophages and B cells in the lungs of ovalbumin-treated mice.
  • Figures 40 D-E depicts the IL-4 levels in spleen recall responses, serum
  • IgE levels and levels of thromboxane, LTB4 and PGE 2 in BAL from ovalbumin- treated mice.
  • Figure 41 shows serum levels of CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] over time in monkeys administered the agent.
  • Figure 42 depicts a competitive assay using 125 I-MCP-1 in the presence of
  • Figure 43 shows the effect of WGQ on THP-1 migration.
  • Figure 44 depicts the effect of WGQ analogs at 100 ⁇ M on THP-1 migration induced by MCP-1. Values are represented as % inhibition of THP-1 migration (as a % of control) ⁇ SEM and are the mean of two separate experiments. The shaded boxes indicate compounds that inhibited THP-1 migration greater than 50%.
  • Figure 45 shows ED 50 of WGQ analogs on THP-1 migration induced by MCP-1.
  • Figure 47 shows neutrophil data from a rat model for stroke (see Figure
  • Figure 48 depicts levels of CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l]- glucoside in serum.
  • Figure 49 depicts effect of CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys I3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] on MlP-l ⁇ -induced chemotaxis.
  • Figure 50 shows the inhibitory effect of A-I in the presence of A) MCP- 1, B) MCP-1, C) RANTES, and D) MlP-l ⁇ .
  • Figure 51 depicts the competitive binding of A-I to chemokine receptors in the presence of chemokine A) MCP-1 and CCR-2, and B) IL-8 and CXCR-2.
  • Figure 52 shows the reverse transcriptase activity present in the culture medium at day 21 after infection of Jurkat cells with a T- tropic HIV. Peptides were added on day 0, one hour prior to infection of the cells with HIV isolate. The full length chemokine SDF-l ⁇ was used as a positive control.
  • Figure 53 shows a graph of the fraction of HIV infected THP-1 cells in the presence of peptide 2 or peptide 3 using a quantitative immunofluorescent (QIF) assay.
  • QIF quantitative immunofluorescent
  • Figure 54 shows chemokine peptide inhibition of HIV infectivity in vitro.
  • HIV (Illb) replication in cultures of Jurkat T-cells was estimated by measuring the supernatant reverse transcriptase activity two weeks after infection. Peptide 2 and peptide 3 were at 100 ⁇ M final concentration and SDF- l ⁇ was added at 100 ng/ml final concentration 1 hour prior to exposure to virus. Values are mean ⁇ SEM from 12 wells, expressed as the percentage of the reverse transcriptase activity in the supernatant from the control wells. The experiment shown is typical of six separate experiments, (b) HIV (Illb) infectivity of Jurkat T-cells was estimated by staining cells treated identically to those in (a) for p24 gag expression.
  • “Chemokines” refers to a family of proinflammatory signaling molecules which act on macrophage, B cells, T cells, neutrophils, eosinophils, basophils, mast cells, smooth muscle cells, e.g., vascular smooth muscle cells, and the like (e.g., by affecting their migration, proliferation, or degranulation, or the immunomodulation of T cell development to Thl and Th2 subtypes).
  • Preferred chemokines are primate in origin, e.g., human, although the invention includes other mammalian chemokines, such as those of bovine, ovine, equine, canine, feline or rodent origin, as well as virally encoded chemokines.
  • Chemokines include, but are not limited to, MCP-1 (SEQ ID NO: 16), MCP-2 (SEQ ID NO:17), MCP-3 (SEQ ID NO:18), MIG (SEQ ID NO:45), MlPl ⁇ (SEQ ID NO: 19), MlPl ⁇ (SEQ ID NO:20), RANTES (SEQ ID NO:21), PF4 (SEQ ID NO:46), 1-309 (SEQ ID NO:47), HCC-1 (SEQ ID NO:48), eotaxin (SEQ ID NO:25), CIO (SEQ ID NO:49), CCR-2 (SEQ ID NO:50), ENA-78 (SEQ ID NO:52), GRO ⁇ (SEQ ID NO:24), GRO ⁇ (SEQ ID NO:53), IL-8 (SEQ ID NO:23), IP, e.g., IP-10 (SEQ ID NO:54), SDFl ⁇ (SEQ ID NO:22), SDFl ⁇ (SEQ ID NO:56), GRO ⁇ (SEQ ID NO
  • CXC or " ⁇ " chemokines include, but are not limited to, IL-8, PF4, IP10, NAP-2, GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , GRO ⁇ , SDF1, MIP2, MGSA, ⁇ lP, CTAPIII, ⁇ -thromboglobulin, MIG, PBP, NAP-2 and ENA78.
  • CC or “ ⁇ ” chemokines include, but are not limited to, MCP-1, MCP-2, MCP-3, MCP-4, MCP-5, RANTES, eotaxin, LARC, TARC, CIO, MlPl ⁇ , MlPl ⁇ , 1309, HCC-1, CK ⁇ 8, CCF18/MRP-2, MlPl ⁇ .
  • a third type of chemokines are "C” chemokines, e.g., lymphotactin.
  • a fourth type of chemokines are “CX 3 C” chemokines such as fractakine or neurotactin (Rollins et al., Blood.2Q, 404 (1997)).
  • a fifth type of chemokines, CX 2 C chemokines, include CCIII.
  • Peptide 3 refers to a peptide derived from a chemokine, which is generally located in (derived from) the carboxy-terminal half of the chemokine, and which inhibits the activity of at least the corresponding native chemokine, as determined by methods well known to the art.
  • Peptide 3 comprises no more than 30, preferably about 3 to about 25, more preferably about 3 to about 15, and even more preferably about 3 to about 11, peptidyl residues which have 100% contiguous amino acid sequence homology or identity to the amino acid sequence of the corresponding native chemokine, preferably a mammalian chemokine, e.g., a primate chemokine such as a human chemokine, or a virally- encoded chemokine.
  • a preferred peptide 3 of MCP-1 that inhibits at least the activity of MCP-1 is peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1], e.g., a peptide which has an amino acid sequence corresponding to SEQ ID NO:l, or a fragment or derivative thereof.
  • peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] e.g., a peptide having an amino acid sequence corresponding to SEQ ID NO:7, or a fragment or derivative thereof.
  • a chemokine peptide 3 of the invention does not include a peptide of IL-8, PF-4 or NAP-2.
  • chemokine amino acid sequences such as the alignment depicted in Table 1, provides a general method to identify the location of peptide 3 sequences in chemokines.
  • peptide 3 in non-MCP-1 chemokines corresponds to about residue 46 to about residue 67 of mature human MCP-1.
  • peptide 3 may comprise moieties other than the amino acid sequence which inhibits chemokine activity, e.g., amino acid residues not present in the native chemokine (i.e., a fusion protein), nucleic acid molecules or targeting moieties such as antibodies or fragments thereof or biotin, so long as these moieties do not substantially reduce the biological activity of peptide 3.
  • a substantial reduction in activity means a reduction in activity of greater than about 99%.
  • a peptide, variant, analog or derivative of the invention has increased affinity for at least one chemokine receptor, e.g., about 1 ⁇ M to about 1 nM, more preferably about 1 nM to about 1 pM, and also preferably has decreased Duffy binding, relative to a corresponding peptide having the native ("wild-type") sequence or relative to the corresponding native chemokine.
  • certain populations have individuals who are Duffy " , e.g., a certain percentage of African Americans are Duffy " .
  • agents useful to treat these populations may have Duffy binding affinity that is equal to or greater than that of the corresponding native chemokine.
  • the terms “isolated and/or purified” refer to in vitro preparation, isolation and/or purification of a therapeutic agent of the invention, so that it is not associated with in vivo substances.
  • an "isolated nucleic acid molecule” which includes a polynucleotide of genomic, cDNA, or synthetic origin or some combination thereof
  • the "isolated nucleic acid molecule” (1) is not associated with all or a portion of a polynucleotide in which the "isolated nucleic acid molecule" is found in nature, (2) is operably linked to a polynucleotide which it is not linked to in nature, or (3) does not occur in nature as part of a larger sequence.
  • An isolated nucleic acid molecule means a polymeric form of nucleotides of at least 10 bases in length, either ribonucleotides or deoxynucleotides or a modified form of either type of nucleotide.
  • the term includes single and double stranded forms of DNA.
  • oligonucleotide referred to herein includes naturally occurring, and modified nucleotides linked together by naturally occurring, and non-naturally occurring oligonucleotide linkages.
  • Oligonucleotides are a polynucleotide subset with 200 bases or fewer in length.
  • oligonucleotides are 10 to 60 bases in length and most preferably 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 to 40 bases in length.
  • Oligonucleotides are usually single stranded, e.g., for probes; although oligonucleotides may be double stranded, e.g., for use in the construction of a variant. Oligonucleotides of the invention can be either sense or antisense oligonucleotides.
  • the term "naturally occurring nucleotides” referred to herein includes deoxyribonucleotides and ribonucleotides.
  • modified nucleotides referred to herein includes nucleotides with modified or substituted sugar groups and the like.
  • oligonucleotide linkages includes oligonucleotides linkages such as phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, phophoroselenoate, phosphorodiselenoate, phosphoroanilothioate, phosphoraniladate, phosphoranidate, and the like.
  • An oligonucleotide can include a label for detection, if desired.
  • isolated polypeptide means a polypeptide encoded by cDNA or recombinant RNA, or is synthetic origin, or some combination thereof, which isolated polypeptide (1) is not associated with proteins found in nature, (2) is free of other proteins from the same source, e.g., free of human proteins, (3) is expressed by a cell from a different species, or (4) does not occur in nature.
  • sequence homology means the proportion of base matches between two nucleic acid sequences or the proportion amino acid matches between two amino acid sequences. When sequence homology is expressed as a percentage, e.g., 50%, the percentage denotes the proportion of matches over the length of sequence from a chemokine that is compared to some other sequence. Gaps (in either of the two sequences) are permitted to maximize matching; gap lengths of 15 bases or less are usually used, 6 bases or less are preferred with 2 bases or less more preferred.
  • the sequence homology between the target nucleic acid and the oligonucleotide sequence is generally not less than 17 target base matches out of 20 possible oligonucleotide base pair matches (85%>); preferably not less than 9 matches out of 10 possible base pair matches (90%), and more preferably not less than 19 matches out of 20 possible base pair matches (95%).
  • the term "selectively hybridize” means to detectably and specifically bind.
  • Polynucleo tides, oligonucleotides and fragments of the invention selectively hybridize to nucleic acid strands under hybridization and wash conditions that minimize appreciable amounts of detectable binding to nonspecific nucleic acids.
  • High stringency conditions can be used to achieve selective hybridization conditions as known in the art and discussed herein.
  • the nucleic acid sequence homology between the polynucleotides, oligonucleotides, and fragments of the invention and a nucleic acid sequence of interest is at least 65%, and more typically with preferably increasing homologies of at least about 70%, about 90%, about 95%, about 98%, and 100%.
  • Two amino acid sequences are homologous if there is a partial or complete identity between their sequences. For example, 85% homology means that 85% ⁇ of the amino acids are identical when the two sequences are aligned for maximum matching. Gaps (in either of the two sequences being matched) are allowed in maximizing matching; gap lengths of 5 or less are preferred with 2 or less being more preferred. Alternatively and preferably, two protein sequences (or polypeptide sequences derived from them of at least 30 amino acids in length) are homologous, as this term is used herein, if they have an alignment score of at more than 5 (in standard deviation units) using the program ALIGN with the mutation data matrix and a gap penalty of 6 or greater. See Dayhoff, M.
  • nucleotide sequence “TAT AC” corresponds to a reference sequence "TAT AC” and is complementary to a reference sequence "GTATA”.
  • reference sequence is a defined sequence used as a basis for a sequence comparison; a reference sequence may be a subset of a larger sequence, for example, as a segment of a full-length cDNA or gene sequence given in a sequence listing, or may comprise a complete cDNA or gene sequence. Generally, a reference sequence is at least 20 nucleotides in length, frequently at least 25 nucleotides in length, and often at least 50 nucleotides in length.
  • two polynucleotides may each (1) comprise a sequence (i.e., a portion of the complete polynucleotide sequence) that is similar between the two polynucleotides, and (2) may further comprise a sequence that is divergent between the two polynucleotides
  • sequence comparisons between two (or more) polynucleotides are typically performed by comparing sequences of the two polynucleotides over a "comparison window" to identify and compare local regions of sequence similarity.
  • a “comparison window”, as used herein, refers to a conceptual segment of at least 20 contiguous nucleotides and wherein the portion of the polynucleotide sequence in the comparison window may comprise additions or deletions (i.e., gaps) of 20 percent or less as compared to the reference sequence (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences.
  • Optimal alignment of sequences for aligning a comparison window may be conducted by the local homology algorithm of Smith and Waterman (1981) Adv. Appl. Math. 2: 482, by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman and Wunsch (1970) J. Mol. Biol. 48: 443, by the search for similarity method of Pearson and Lipman (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad.
  • sequence identity means that two polynucleotide sequences are identical (i.e., on a nucleotide-by-nucleotide basis) over the window of comparison.
  • percentage of sequence identity means that two polynucleotide sequences are identical (i.e., on a nucleotide-by-nucleotide basis) over the window of comparison.
  • percentage of sequence identity is calculated by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over the window of comparison, determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base (e.g., A, T, C, G, U, or I) occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison (i.e., the window size), and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity.
  • the identical nucleic acid base e.g., A, T, C, G, U, or I
  • substantially identical denote a characteristic of a polynucleotide sequence, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a sequence that has at least 85 percent sequence identity, preferably at least 90 to 95 percent sequence identity, more usually at least 99 percent sequence identity as compared to a reference sequence over a comparison window of at least 20 nucleotide positions, frequently over a window of at least 20-50 nucleotides, wherein the percentage of sequence identity is calculated by comparing the reference sequence to the polynucleotide sequence which may include deletions or additions which total 20 percent or less of the reference sequence over the window of comparison.
  • the reference sequence may be a subset of a larger sequence, for example, as a segment of human MCP-1.
  • substantially identical means that two peptide sequences, when optimally aligned, such as by the programs GAP or BESTFIT using default gap weights, share at least about 80 percent sequence identity, preferably at least about 90 percent sequence identity, more preferably at least about 95 percent sequence identity, and most preferably at least about 99 percent sequence identity.
  • label refers to inco ⁇ oration of a detectable marker, e.g., by inco ⁇ oration of a radiolabeled amino acid or attachment to a polypeptide of biotinyl moieties that can be detected by marked avidin (e.g., streptavidin containing a fluorescent marker or enzymatic activity that can be detected by optical or colorimetric methods).
  • marked avidin e.g., streptavidin containing a fluorescent marker or enzymatic activity that can be detected by optical or colorimetric methods.
  • Various methods of labeling polypeptides are known in the art and may be used. Examples of labels for polypeptides include, but are not limited to, the following: radioisotopes
  • labels are attached by spacer arms of various lengths to reduce potential steric hindrance.
  • substantially pure means an object species is the predominant species present (i.e., on a molar basis it is more abundant than any other individual species in the composition), and preferably a substantially purified fraction is a composition wherein the object species comprises at least about 50 percent (on a molar basis) of all macromolecular species present. Generally, a substantially pure composition will comprise more than about 80 percent of all macromolecular species present in the composition, more preferably more than about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, and about 99%. Most preferably, the object species is purified to essential homogeneity (contaminant species cannot be detected in the composition by conventional detection methods) wherein the composition consists essentially of a single macromolecular species.
  • chemokine peptide variant of peptide 3 or peptide 2 is a peptide comprising no more than 30, preferably about 3 to about 25, and more preferably about 3 to about 18, and even more preferably about 3 to about 11, peptidyl residues which have at least 50%, preferably at least about 80%, and more preferably at least about 90% but less than 100%, contiguous amino acid sequence homology or identity to the amino acid sequence of the corresponding native chemokine, e.g., Ser 7 peptide 3(1-12)[MCP1] (SEQ ID NO:l l) has less than 100%) homology to the corresponding amino acid sequence of MCP-1, i.e., peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l).
  • a variant of the invention may include amino acid residues not present in the corresponding native chemokine, and internal deletions relative to the corresponding native chemokine.
  • Chemokine peptide variants include peptides having at least one D-amino acid.
  • Chemokine peptides or peptide variants which are subjected to chemical modifications, such as esterification, amidation, reduction, protection and the like, are referred to as chemokine "derivatives.”
  • chemokine derivatives for example, a modification known to improve the stability and bioavailability of peptides in vivo is the cyclization of the peptide, for example through one or more disulf ⁇ de bonds.
  • a preferred modification is the synthesis of a cyclic reverse sequence derivative (CRD) of a peptide of the invention.
  • CCD cyclic reverse sequence derivative
  • a linear peptide is synthesized with all D- form amino acids using the reverse (i.e., C-terminal to N-terminal) sequence of the peptide. If necessary, additional cysteine residues are added to the N and C termini (if the peptide sequence does not already have N and C terminal cys residues), thereby allowing oxidative cyclization.
  • CCD includes cyclization by other mechanisms, e.g., via a peptidyl bond, and the like.
  • a preferred derivative of the invention is CRD-Cys 0 Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile u peptide 3[MCP-1] or CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile ⁇ peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l]. Also included within the scope of the term “derivative” is linear reverse D (LRD) and cyclized forward L (CFL) derivatives. LRD derivatives have the reverse (i.e., C-terminal to N-terminal) sequence of the peptide with all D-form amino acids, but are not cyclized.
  • CFL derivatives have the forward (i.e., N- terminal to C-terminal) sequence of the peptide with all L-form amino acids, but with additional N and C terminal cys residues (if the peptide sequence does not already have cys residues at either the N or the C terminal position), followed by oxidative cyclization, or cyclization by an alternative method.
  • Other "derivatives" of the invention include branched peptides, circular, branched and branched circular peptides.
  • a "chemokine analog” means a moiety that mimics or inhibits a chemokine-induced activity, or binds to or near a chemokine receptor but does not mimic or inhibit chemokine activity (neutral), wherein the portion of the moiety that mimics or inhibits the chemokine-induced activity, or binds to or near the receptor but is neutral, is not a peptide, and wherein the active portion of the analog is not a nucleic acid molecule.
  • the term “mimics” means that the moiety induces an activity that is induced by a native chemokine, but that the induction by the analog is not necessarily of the same magnitude as the induction of activity by the native chemokine.
  • the chemokine peptides, variants, analogs and derivatives thereof, of the invention may comprise moieties other than the portion which inhibits or mimics chemokine activity, or binds to or near a chemokine receptor without eliciting or inhibiting signaling, e.g., peptide or polypeptide molecules, such as antibodies or fragments thereof or fusion proteins, nucleic acid molecules, sugars, lipids, fats, a detectable signal molecule such as a radioisotope, e.g., gamma emitters, paramagnetic molecules or sound wave emitters, small chemicals, metals, salts, synthetic polymers, e.g., polylactide and polyglycolide, surfactants and glycosaminoglycans, which preferably are covalently attached or linked to the portion of the peptide, variant, analog or derivative that mimics or inhibits the chemokine-induced activity, so long as the other moieties do not alter the biological
  • saccharide includes monosaccharides, disaccharides, trisaccharides and polysaccharides.
  • the term includes glucose, sucrose fructose and ribose, as well as deoxy sugars such as deoxyribose and the like.
  • Saccharide derivatives can conveniently be prepared as described in International Patent Applications Publication Numbers WO 96/34005 and WO97/03995.
  • a saccharide can conveniently be linked to the remainder of a compound of formula I through an ether bond.
  • halo is fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo.
  • alkyl and alkoxy denote both straight and branched groups, but reference to an individual radical such as "propyl” embraces only the straight chain radical, a branched chain isomer such as “isopropyl” being specifically referred to.
  • Aryl denotes a phenyl radical or an ortho-fused bicyclic carbocyclic radical having about nine to ten ring atoms in which at least one ring is aromatic.
  • Heteroaryl encompasses a radical attached via a ring carbon of a monocyclic aromatic ring containing five or six ring atoms consisting of carbon and one to four heteroatoms each selected from the group consisting of non-peroxide oxygen, sulfur, and N(R 4 ) wherein R 4 is absent or is hydrogen, (C,-C 4 )alkyl, phenyl or benzyl, as well as a radical of an ortho-fused bicyclic heterocycle of about eight to ten ring atoms derived therefrom, particularly a benz-derivative or one derived by fusing a propylene, trimethylene, or tetra methylene diradical thereto.
  • a preferred chemokine analog of the invention is a compound of formula (IV):
  • R 3 is (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C r C 6 )alkyl, (C r C 10 )alkoxy, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C r C 6 )alkoxy or N(R c )(R d ); wherein Y is oxo or thioxo; wherein Z is (C r C 15 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C r
  • R a -R j are each independently hydrogen, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C r C 10 )alkanoyl, phenyl, benzyl, or phenethyl; or R a and R b , R c and R d , R e and R f , R s and R h , or R' and R J together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a ring selected from pyrrolidino, piperidino, or mo ⁇ holino; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a preferred embodiment of a compound of formula (IV) includes a compound of formula (IV) wherein R 1 is aryl, heteroaryl, coumaryl, or chromanyl. Preferably aryl is phenyl; and heteroaryl is indolyl or pyridinyl.
  • Another preferred embodiment of a compound of formula (IV) includes a compound of a formula (IV) wherein R 2 is N(R a )(R b ); and R 3 is N(R c )(R d ).
  • Yet another preferred embodiment of a compound of formula (IV) includes a compound of a formula (IV) wherein Z is (C,-C 15 )alkyl.
  • a further preferred compound is a compound of formula (IV) wherein R 1 is indolyl; R 2 is N(R a )(R b ); R 3 is N(R c )(R d ); Y is S; Z is hydrogen; and R a , R b , R c , and R d are each methyl.
  • Yet another preferred compound of formula (IV) includes a compound wherein R 1 is 2-benzimidazolyl; for R 2 is N(R a )(R b ); R 3 is N(R c )(R d ); Y is oxo; and Z is N(R e )(R f ) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Another preferred compound of formula (IV) is a compound wherein R 1 is 2- benzimidazolyl; R 2 is N(Me) 2 ; R 3 is N(Me) 2 ; Y is oxo; and Z is N(Me) 2 ; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • Another preferred chemokine analog of the invention is a compound of formula (V):
  • R 4 is NR k R,; wherein R 5 is Nl ⁇ -R,,; wherein R 6 is NR 0 R p ; wherein R 7 is Nr q R-.; wherein R 8 is hydrogen, hydroxy, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 - C 6 )cycloalkyl(C r C 6 )alkyl, (C r C 10 )alkoxy, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C,-C 6 )alkoxy, NR S R,, the amino terminus of an amino acid or the N-terminal residue of a peptide of 2 to about 25 amino acid residues; wherein R k , R protagonist R 0 , and R p are each independently hydrogen, (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C
  • R q are R ⁇ are each independently hydrogen, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 - C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 - C 6 )cycloalkyl(C,-C 6 )alkyl, (C,-C 10 )alkoxy, (C,-C 10 )alkanoyl, (C,- C 10 )alkoxycarbonyl, 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl, phenyl, benzyl, phenethyl, the C-terminal residue of an amino acid or a peptide of 2 to about 25 amino acid residues; wherein R q are R ⁇ are each independently hydrogen, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 - C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl(C r C 6 )alkyl, phenyl, benzyl or phenethyl; wherein R s are R
  • R k , R,, R 0 , and R p are each hydrogen;
  • R,,, are R, are each independently hydrogen, acetyl, (C,-C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, propoxy, butoxy, tert-butoxycarbonyl, 9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl, the C-terminal residue of an amino acid or a peptide of 2 to about 25 amino acid residues;
  • R q are R,. are each independently hydrogen, (C r C 10 )alkyl, or (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl.
  • chemokine is a compound of formula (XIII):
  • R ⁇ is aryl, heteroaryl, aryl(C,-C I0 )alkyl, aryl(C r C 10 )alkanoyl, heteroaryl(C r C 10 )alkyl, or heteroaryl(C !
  • R 2 is hydrogen, (C,- C 15 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 )cycloalkyl, (C 3 -C 8 )cycloalkyl(C,-C 10 )alkyl, aryl, or aryl(C r C 10 )alkyl;
  • R 3 is hydrogen, or (C,-C 10 )alkyl,
  • R 4 is hydrogen, or (C r C 10 )alkyl;
  • R 5 is N(R a )(R b );
  • R 6 is N(R a )(R b ); and each R a and R° is independently hydrogen, (C,- C 10 )alkyl, (C r C 10 )alkanoyl, or aryl(C r C 10 )alkyl; or R a and R b together with the nitrogen to which they are attached form a pyrrolidino, piperidino or mo ⁇ holino ring; wherein any
  • R can specifically be 3- indolylmethyl;
  • R 2 can specifically be isopropyl, tert-butyl, or phenyl;
  • R 3 can specifically be methyl;
  • R 4 can specifically be hydrogen;
  • R 5 can specifically be amino;
  • R 6 can specifically be dimethylamino, benzylamino, or hydroxybenzylamino.
  • Another preferred analog of the invention is a compound of formula (XI):
  • compounds of formula (IV), (V), (VI), (XIII), (XIV), (X), (XI), (XIX), and (XII), and compounds of the invention which are peptides having chiral centers may exist in and be isolated in optically active and racemic forms.
  • compounds of the invention comprise ⁇ -amino acid residues in D or L form, or mixtures thereof. Some compounds may exhibit polymo ⁇ hism.
  • the present invention encompasses any racemic, optically-active, polymo ⁇ hic, or stereoisomeric form, or mixtures thereof, of a compound of the invention, which possess the useful properties described herein.
  • optically active forms for example, by resolution of the racemic form by recrystallization techniques, by synthesis, from optically-active starting materials, by chiral synthesis, or by chromatographic separation using a chiral stationary phase. It is also well known to the art how to determine a compounds ability to inhibit or enhance chemokine-induced activity using the standard tests described herein, or using other tests which are well known in the art.
  • (C,-C 15 )alkyl can be methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, 3-pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, 9-methylundecyl, dodecyl;
  • (C r C 6 )alkyl can be methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, 3-pentyl, or hexyl;
  • (C,-C 3 )alkyl can be methyl, ethyl, or propyl;
  • agents of the invention e.g. peptide 3, varients or derivatives thereof, a compound of formula (IV), a compound of formula (V), a compound of formula (VI), a compound of formula (XIII), a compound of formula (XIV), a compound of formula (X), a compound of formula (XI), a compound of formula (XIX), or a compound of formula (XII)
  • a preferred saccharide conjugate is the peptide derivative CRD- Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] linked to a one or more saccharides.
  • the peptide derivative may be linked to the saccharide by an aminoglycosidic bond to either or both the amino terminus and one or both lysine e-amino groups (for example as prepared in example 18).
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention are biologically active.
  • biologically active peptide 3 [MCP-1] variants falling within the scope of the invention have at least about 1%, preferably at least about 10%, more preferably at least about 50%, and even more preferably at least about 90% ⁇ , the activity of the corresponding native peptide sequence, e.g., peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l), or the native chemokine, e.g., MCP-1 (SEQ ID NO:16).
  • a peptide 3 variant e.g., Leu 4 Ile ⁇ peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] falling within the scope of the invention has an ED 50 for inhibition that is at least about 1%, preferably at least about 10%, more preferably at least about 50%, and even more preferably at least about 90%, the maximal activity of peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) at 100 ⁇ M.
  • a chemokine-induced activity includes, but is not limited to, an activity that is elicited through the binding of a chemokine, a therapeutic agent of the invention or other moiety, e.g., viral protein, to a chemokine receptor, or the binding of a therapeutic agent or other moiety in close physical proximity to the receptor so that the activity is altered.
  • Chemokine receptors include, but are not limited to, CCRl (CC-CKRI), CCR2a, CCR2b, CCR3, CCR4, CCR5, CCR6, CCR7, CCR8, HGBER32 (WO98/09171), CXCR1 (IL8RI), CXCR2, CXCR3, CX 3 CR1, CXCR4 and CXCR5.
  • Chemotide receptors play a role in cell migration, cell activation, viral or parasite entry, release of proinflammatory compounds, and the like.
  • chemokine-induced activity includes, but is not limited to, atherosclerosis and other forms of local or systemic vasculitis, e.g., Behcet's syndrome, giant cell arteritis, polymyalgia rheumatica, Wegener's granulomatosis, Churg-Strauss syndrome vasculitis, Henoch-Sch ⁇ nlein pu ⁇ ura, Kawasaki disease, microscopic polyanglitis, Takayasu's arteritis, essential cryoglobulinemic vasculitis, cutaneous leukocytoclastic anglitis, polyarteritis nodosa, primary granulomatous central nervous system vasculitis, drug-induced antineutrophil cytoplasmic autoantibodies (ANCA)-associated vasculitis, cryoglobulinemic vasculitis, lupus vasculitis, rheumatoid vasculitis, Sj ⁇ gren's syndrome vas
  • ANCA antineutrophil cyto
  • autoimmune disorders including, but not limited to, type I diabetes, Crohn's disease, multiple sclerosis, arthritis, rheumatoid arthritis (Ogata et al., .LEalhoL, 152, 106 (1997); Gong et al., J. Exp. Ms ⁇ , 186, 131 (1997)), systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune
  • autoimmune liver diseases such as hepatitis and primary biliary cirrhosis, hyperthyroidism (Graves' disease; thyrotoxicosis), insulin-resistant diabetes, autoimmune adrenal insufficiency (Addison's disease), autoimmune oophoritis, autoimmune orchitis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria, Behcet's disease, autoimmune thrombocytopenia, autoimmune neutropenia, pernicious anemia, pure red cell anemia, autoimmune coagulopathies, myasthenia gravis, experimental allergic encephalomyelitis, autoimmune polyneuritis, pemphigus and other bullous diseases, rheumatic carditis, Goodpasture's syndrome, postcardiotomy syndrome, Sjogren's syndrome, polymyositis, dermatomyositis, and scleroderma; eye diseases such as uveitis or
  • Pathol., 178, 201 (1996)
  • skin diseases such as psoriasis (Gillitzer et al, Arch. Dermatol. Res., 284, 26 (1992); Yu et al., Lab Investig., 71, 226 (1994)) and lichen planus, delayed type hypersensitivity, Alzheimer's disease (Johnstone et al, J. Neuroimmunol., 23., 182 (1999)), chronic pulmonary inflammation, e.g., pulmonary alveolitis and pulmonary granuloma, gingival inflammation or other periodontal disease, and osseous inflammation associated with lesions of endodontic origin (Volejnikova et al., Am. J.
  • Tm unol., 2&, 355 (1996) such as hay fever, histamine release from mast cells (Galli et al., Ciba Foundation Symposium, 142, 53(1989)), or mast cell tumors, types of type 1 hypersensitivity reactions (anaphylaxis, skin allergy, hives, allergic rhinitis, and allergic gastroenteritis); glomerulonephritis (Gesualdo et al., Kidney International, 51, 155 (1997)); inflammation associated with peritoneal dialysis (Sach et al, Nephrol, Dial. Transplant, 12, 315 (1997)); emphysema; and pancreatitis.
  • neoplasia e.g., histocytoma, glioma, sarcoma, osteosarcoma, osteoma (Zheng et al., J. Cell Biochem., 2 ⁇ , 121 (1998)), melanoma, Kaposi's sarcoma, small cell lung cancer, and ovarian carcinoma as well as myelosuppression and mucositis associated with chemotherapy; inflammatory pseudo tumor of the lung; brain or spinal cord trauma, such as after disc surgery (Ghirnikar et al., J. Neurosci. Res., 46, 727 (1996); Berman et al., J.
  • lung disease e.g., due to respiratory syncicial virus infection of humans, cattle, pigs and the like, or lung injury (Lukacs et al., Adv. Tmmunol..62, 257 (1996)); adult respiratory distress syndrome (see Robbins, Pathologic Basis of Disease, Cotran et al.
  • Enterobiasis Enterobiasis, Ascariasis, Hookworm, Strongyloidiasis, Trichinosis, filariasis); trematodes (fluxes) (Schistosomiasis, Clonorchiasis), cestode (tape worms) (Echinococcosis, Taeniasis saginata, Cysticercosis); visceral works, visceral larva migrans (e.g., Toxocara), eosinophilic gastroenteritis (e.g., Anisaki spp., Phocanema ssp.), cutaneous larva migrans (Ancylostoma braziliense, Ancylostoma caninum), or fungal infection.
  • the peptides of the invention may also be useful as contraceptives or to induce abortion, in acute respiratory distress syndrome, and diseases where steroids are routinely used (e.g., relapsing Beheers colitis and asthma).
  • TNF ⁇ tumor necrosis factor ⁇
  • indications associated with tumor necrosis factor ⁇ include, but are not limited to, endotoxic shock; Crohn's disease; fever, and flulike symptoms; acute interstitial pneumonitis; septic and nonseptic shock; acute respiratory distress syndrome; thromboembolic conditions; bone reso ⁇ tion; arthritis; acute graft versus host disease; leprosy; malaria; cerebral malaria; cachexia of tuberculosis or cancer; and idiopathic fibrosis.
  • Agents useful in the practice of the invention include agents that inhibit or reduce (e.g., chemokine receptor antagonists), or increase, augment or enhance (e.g., chemokine receptor agonists), chemokine-induced activity, e.g., monocyte or macrophage recruitment. These agents can be identified by in vitro and in vivo assays, such as the assays described hereinbelow. It is recognized that not all agents falling within the scope of the invention can inhibit or enhance chemokine-induced activity in vitro and in vivo.
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention may be direct receptor binding agonists and/or antagonists, or may act by a different mechanism, e.g., duplex formation of antisense nucleic acid with chemokine mRNA, or by more than one mechanism, so as to result in the alteration of chemokine-induced activity.
  • a different mechanism e.g., duplex formation of antisense nucleic acid with chemokine mRNA, or by more than one mechanism, so as to result in the alteration of chemokine-induced activity.
  • varying amounts of the agent are mixed with cells in the presence of a known chemoattractant.
  • a range of known concentrations of an agent e.g., a chemokine peptide
  • a defined number e.g. 10 4 - 10 6
  • Chemokine (such as MCP-1, MlPl ⁇ , IL8 or SDF-l ⁇ ), at a concentration known to cause significant migration of THP-1 cells in the trans- well migration assay, is placed in the lower compartment ( Figure 1).
  • Cells are then incubated at 37°C for a period sufficient to allow migration, e.g., 4 hours. After incubation, the cells are gently removed from the top of the filter with a pipette, 20 ⁇ l of 20 mM EDTA in simple PBS is added into each top well, and incubated for 20 minutes at 4°C. The filter is carefully flushed with media using a gentle flow, and removed. A standard curve consisting of a two-fold dilution series of THP-1 cells (in 29 ⁇ l) is prepared to accurately quantify the number of cells that have migrated.
  • Migrated cells are stained with 3 ⁇ l of MTT stock dye solution which is added directly into each well (5 mg/ml in RPMI-1640 without phenol red, Sigma Chemical Co.) and incubated at 37°C for 4 hours. The media is carefully aspirated from each well, and the converted dye is solubilized by 20 ⁇ l of DMSO. Absorbance of converted dye is measured at a wavelength of 595 nm using an ELIS A plate reader. The number of migrated cells in each well is then determined by inte ⁇ olation of the standard curve (see also Imai et al., J. Biol. Chem., 222, 15036 (1997)).
  • Any method suitable for counting cells can be used, for example, counting with a hemocytometer, incubation of the cells with MTT (see above), or FACS analysis.
  • a negative control assay is also performed, using TGF- ⁇ or another non-chemokine chemoattractant (e.g., ILl ⁇ or TNF ⁇ ).
  • TGF- ⁇ or another non-chemokine chemoattractant e.g., ILl ⁇ or TNF ⁇ .
  • Agents may also be screened in a chemotactic assay which employs human neutrophils, eosinophils, mast cells, basophils, platelets, lymphocytes or monocytes.
  • a chemotactic assay employs human neutrophils, eosinophils, mast cells, basophils, platelets, lymphocytes or monocytes.
  • monocytes 9 mis of fresh blood are transferred to a tube containing 1 ml of 3.8% sodium citrate, and left at room temperature for 15 minutes. Five mis of this anti-coagulated blood are carefully layered over 3.5 ml Polymo ⁇ hprep® (Nycomed Pharma, Oslo), and centrifuged at 500 g for 35 minutes per the manufacturer's instructions. The top band at the sample/medium interface contains monocytes. The monocytes are carefully removed with a glass pipette, and reconstituted to the original volume (5 ml).
  • the cells are washed with PBS plus 10% fetal calf serum, and centrifuged at 400 g for 10 minutes. The washing step is repeated three times before the cells are counted.
  • Cells are resuspended at 1 x 10 7 cells/ml in RPMI-1640 + 10% fetal calf serum (FCS).
  • FCS fetal calf serum
  • the cells are counted, spun down, and reconstituted to 1 x 10 7 cells/ml in Gey's balanced salt solution + 1 mg/ml bovine serum albumin (BSA).
  • BSA bovine serum albumin
  • Chemotaxis is induced in a 48 or 96-well disposable chemotaxis chamber fitted with a 5-8 ⁇ m polycarbonate filter for monocytes, neutrophils or eosinophils, or a 3 ⁇ m filter for lymphocytes (Uguccioni et al, Fur. J. Tmmunol.. 25, 64 (1995); Loetscher et al., J. F.xp. Med.. IM, 569 (1996); Weber et al., L Immunol ..
  • N-acetyl- ⁇ -D-glucosaminidase from monocytes may be employed to determine whether a therapeutic agent inhibits a cytokine-associated activity.
  • Samples of 1.2 x 10 6 monocytes in 0.3 ml of prewarmed medium (136 mM ⁇ aCl, 4.8 mM KC1, 1.2 mM KH 2 PO 4 , 1 mM CaCl 2 , 20 mM Hepes, pH 7.4, 5 mM D-glucose, and 1 mg/ml fatty acid-free BSA) are pretreated for 2 minutes with cytochalasin B (2.7 mg/ml) and then stimulated with a chemokine in the presence or absence of the therapeutic agent. The reaction is stopped after 3 minutes by cooling on ice and centrifugation, and the enzyme activity is determined in the supernatant (Uguccioni et al., Eur. J. Immunol ., 25, 64 (1995)).
  • elastase from neutrophils may also be employed to determine whether a therapeutic agent inhibits a cytokine-associated activity (Pereri et al., J. Rxp. Med. : 1547 (1988); Clark-Lewis et al., J. Biol. Chem.. 262, 16075 (1994)). 3. Cytosolic free Ca 2+ concentration ([Ca 2+ ] ) changes
  • Monocytes, eosinophils, neutrophils and lymphocytes loaded with Fura-2 (0.1 nmol/10 5 cells) are stimulated with a chemokine in the presence or absence of the therapeutic agent, and [Ca 2+ ].-related fluorescence changes are recorded (Von Tschanner et al., Nature, 324, 369 (1986)).
  • monocytes are incubated with 0.5 ⁇ M Fura-2/AM for 30 minutes at 37°C in HEPES -buffered saline (145 mM NaCl, 5 mM KC1, 1 mM MgCl 2 , 10 mM HEPES, and 10 mM glucose), pH 7.4, at 37 °C, supplemented with 1% albumin (w/v) and 1 mM CaCl 2 .
  • HEPES -buffered saline 145 mM NaCl, 5 mM KC1, 1 mM MgCl 2 , 10 mM HEPES, and 10 mM glucose
  • pH 7.4 pH 7.4
  • albumin w/v
  • the cells After loading with Fura-2, the cells are centrifuged for 5 minutes at 300 x g and then resuspended in buffer containing no added albumin, to a cell density of 1.5 * 10 6 cells/ml, and kept at room temperature until use.
  • This protocol results in a cytosolic Fura-2 concentration of about 100 ⁇ M.
  • Serial dilutions of chemokines in PBS plus 0.1 % albumin (w/v) (sterile filtered) are added to aliquots (0.7 ml) of cell suspension.
  • the Fura-2 fluorescence of the monocyte suspension is measured at 37°C in a single excitation, single emission (500 nm) wavelength Perkin-Elmer LS5 fluorometer.
  • [Ca 2+ ] is calculated from changes in fluorescence measured at a single excitation wavelength of 340 nm. [Ca 2+ ], measurements in cells that are stably transformed with a molecularly cloned chemokine receptor which is not expressed in the corresponding non-transformed cells are performed essentially as described above.
  • cells (1 x lOVml) are kept in ice-cold medium (118 mM NaCl, 4.6 mM KC1, 25 mM NaHCO 3 , 1 mM KH 2 PO 4 , 11 mM glucose, 50 mM HEPES, 1 mM MgCl 2 , 1 mM CaCl 2 , 0.1% gelatin (pH 7.4).
  • Aliquots (2 ml) of cell suspension are prewarmed at 37 °C for 5 minutes in 3-ml plastic cuvettes, and fluorescence is measured in a fluorometer (Johnson Foundation Biomedical Group) with magnetic stirring and temperature controlled at 37°C. Excitation is set at 340 nm, and emission is set at 510 nm.
  • [Ca 2+ ] j is calculated as described above.
  • chemokines are added sequentially with a 2-minute interval, and [Ca 2+ ] ; transients are recorded.
  • concentrations used in these types of studies vary for each chemokine and are set at levels known to induce the maximal response for [Ca 2+ ] f mobilization (see Forssmann et al., FRBS Lett., 408, 211 (1997); Sozzani et al., J. T.eiikoc. Biol.. 52, 788 (1995); Berkhout et al., J. Biol. Chem.. 222, 16404 (1997)). 4. Chemokine binding and binding displacement
  • specific binding is calculated as the amount of labeled agent bound in the absence of cold competitor minus the amount of labeled agent bound in the presence of cold competitor.
  • the amount of specific binding in the presence of varied amounts of cold competitor can be used to determine the association constant for the agent, as well as the number of binding sites on the cell for the agent, using, for example, Scatchard Analysis.
  • the agent may be labeled by radiolabeling (e.g., iodination) or with a suitable biochemical tag (e.g., biotin) or by addition of a photoactivatable crosslinking group.
  • THP-1 cells have at least about 5,000 MCP-1 receptors/cell.
  • monocytes are suspended in RPMI 1640 medium without bicarbonate containing 0.2% bovine serum albumin and 0.1 % azide.
  • Radiolabeled chemokine peptide is incubated with 1-2 x 10 6 cells, e.g., THP-1 cells, in the presence or absence of increasing concentrations of unlabeled chemokine (MCP-1, MCP-3, MCP-4, RANTES or MlP-l ⁇ ) for 15 minutes at 37°C in a 96-well plate in a final volume of 0.2 ml (e.g., PBS + 0.5% FCS).
  • 0.5 ml of ice-cold wash buffer (20 mM Tris, 0.5 M NaCl, pH 7.4) is added, and cells are collected onto a polyethyleneimine-treated Whatman GF/C filter using a Brandall cell harvester. Filters are washed with 4 ml of cold wash buffer, and the radioactivity bound to the filters is counted in a ⁇ -counter.
  • the cmp bound is corrected for "no cell" controls.
  • K d and capacity of binding specific binding data from homologous displacement experiments are fitted into a single-site ligand binding equation using the GraFit best fit program.
  • Chemokine binding to cells stably transformed with a molecularly cloned chemokine receptor is performed essentially as described above except that radiolabeled agent is diluted with unlabeled chemokine. Cells are incubated with radiolabeled agent plus or minus unlabeled chemokines for 30 minutes at 37 °C (see also, Imai et al., supra; Sozzani et al. (1995), supra; Berkhout et al., supra; WO 97/22698).
  • the affinity of the therapeutic agent to DARC may be determined by any method known in the art, e.g., the ability of the agent to inhibit the binding of radio-iodinated MCP-1 to red blood cells.
  • Agents which bind to DARC with a lower association constant (i.e., stronger binding) than they bind to chemokine receptors (i.e., a DARC selectivity ratio of ⁇ 1), and which bind to DARC with an association constant lower than 100 ⁇ M, preferably lower than 10 ⁇ M and more preferably lower than 1 ⁇ M, are useful in particular embodiments of the methods of the invention.
  • agents which do not bind DARC, or do not bind to DARC with an affinity that is greater than their affinity for chemokine receptors are useful in the practice of other embodiments of the methods of the invention.
  • FCS is a mitogen for smooth muscle cells.
  • Assays well known to the art for determination of DNA synthesis induced by any known chemokine plus a low concentration ( ⁇ 5%) of FCS on suitable cells (e.g., smooth muscle cells) in the presence and absence of the agent may be employed to screen agents for such inhibitory activity. See Porreca et al., J. Vase. Res., 34, 58 (1997), the disclosure of which is inco ⁇ orated by reference herein. 7.
  • an agent of the invention is a chemokine receptor agonist
  • varying amounts of a labeled form of the agent e.g., biotinylated
  • cells that express the receptor e.g., THP-1 cells express receptors for MCP-1, MlPl ⁇ , SDF-l ⁇ and IL-8, while Jurkat cells express functional receptors for SDF-1.
  • THP-1 cells express receptors for MCP-1, MlPl ⁇ , SDF-l ⁇ and IL-8
  • Jurkat cells express functional receptors for SDF-1.
  • Agents that bind to receptors with a reasonable affinity and interact with the receptor by inducing signaling, are within the scope of the invention.
  • agents that bind to or near the receptor but elicit no response are also within the scope of the invention, and are termed “neutral” agents.
  • Agents with agonist activity may also be identified using the transwell migration assay, where the cells are placed in the upper compartment (see Figure 1) in the absence of agent, and the agent, e.g. peptide 2[MCP-1], is placed at varying concentrations in the lower compartment in place of the chemokine. If the agent(s) have agonist activity, more cells are found in the lower compartment at the end of the assay in wells containing the agent(s) than in wells containing inactive control, i.e., agent or medium alone.
  • agents having agonist activity also stimulate migration of primary human cells, e.g., monocytes, in a transwell migration assay.
  • weak agonists or neutral agonists can be identified by screening the agents for ability to displace the binding of HIV g ⁇ l20, specifically the V3 loop of gpl20, to the surface of THP-1 cells or Jurkat cells. Cells are incubated with labeled (for example, radioiodinated) recombinant g ⁇ l20 protein in an amount effective to bind to the virus receptor, in the presence and absence of various concentrations of the agent(s). Agents which reduce or abolish gpl20 binding are agonists or neutral agonists within the scope of the invention. 8. In vivo
  • a rapid method to determine whether an agent of the invention inhibits or augments an inflammatory response is to inject a selected chemokine into the skin of an animal in the presence or absence of an agent of the invention.
  • animals are sacrificed and the number of inflammatory cells at the chemokine injection site in animals exposed to both chemokine and the test agent is compared to the number of inflammatory cells at the chemokine injection site in animals exposed to chemokine alone, e.g., by quantitative immunofluorescence, relative to control animals.
  • Sources of nucleotide sequences from which the present nucleic acid molecules encoding a chemokine peptide, a variant thereof or the nucleic acid complement thereof include total or polyA + RNA from any eukaryotic, preferably mammalian, cellular source from which cDNAs can be derived by methods known in the art.
  • Other sources of the DNA molecules of the invention include genomic libraries derived from any eukaryotic cellular source.
  • the present DNA molecules may be prepared in vitro, e.g., by synthesizing an oligonucleotide of about 100, preferably about 75, more preferably about 50, and even more preferably about 40, nucleotides in length, or by subcloning a portion of a DNA segment that encodes a particular chemokine.
  • a nucleic acid molecule encoding a chemokine can be identified and isolated using standard methods, as described by Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor, NY (1989).
  • RT-PCR reverse-transcriptase PCR
  • Oligo-dT can be employed as a primer in a reverse transcriptase reaction to prepare first-strand cDNAs from isolated RNA which contains RNA sequences of interest, e.g., total RNA isolated from human tissue.
  • RNA can be isolated by methods known to the art, e.g., using TRIZOL TM reagent (GIBCO-BRL/Life Technologies, Gaithersburg, MD).
  • PCR Polymerase chain reaction
  • RNA and/or DNA are amplified as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,683,195.
  • sequence information from the ends of the region of interest or beyond is employed to design oligonucleotide primers comprising at least 7-8 nucleotides. These primers will be identical or similar in sequence to opposite strands of the template to be amplified.
  • PCR can be used to amplify specific RNA sequences, specific DNA sequences from total genomic DNA, and cDNA transcribed from total cellular RNA, bacteriophage or plasmid sequences, and the like. See generally Mullis et al., Cold Spring Harbor Sy p. Quant. Biol., ⁇ , 263 (1987); Erlich, ed., PCR Technology, (Stockton Press, NY, 1989). Thus, PCR-based cloning approaches rely upon conserved sequences deduced from alignments of related gene or polypeptide sequences.
  • Primers are made to correspond to highly conserved regions of polypeptides or nucleotide sequences which were identified and compared to generate the primers, e.g., by a sequence comparison of other eukaryotic chemokines.
  • One primer is prepared which is predicted to anneal to the antisense strand, and another primer prepared which is predicted to anneal to the sense strand, of a DNA molecule which encodes a chemokine.
  • the products of each PCR reaction are separated via an agarose gel and all consistently amplified products are gel-purified and cloned directly into a suitable vector, such as a known plasmid vector.
  • the resultant plasmids are subjected to restriction endonuclease and dideoxy sequencing of double-stranded plasmid DNAs.
  • Another approach to identify, isolate and clone cDNAs which encode a chemokine is to screen a cDNA library. Screening for DNA fragments that encode all or a portion of a cDNA encoding a chemokine can be accomplished by probing the library with a probe which has sequences that are highly conserved between genes believed to be related to the chemokine, e.g., the homo log of a particular chemokine from a different species, or by screening of plaques for binding to antibodies that specifically recognize the chemokine.
  • DNA fragments that bind to a probe having sequences which are related to the chemokine, or which are immunoreactive with antibodies to the chemokine can be subcloned into a suitable vector and sequenced and/or used as probes to identify other cDNAs encoding all or a portion of the chemokine.
  • isolated and/or purified refer to in vitro isolation of a DNA or polypeptide molecule from its natural cellular environment, and from association with other components of the cell, such as nucleic acid or polypeptide, so that it can be sequenced, replicated, and/or expressed.
  • isolated chemokine nucleic acid is RNA or DNA containing greater than 9, preferably 36, and more preferably 45 or more, sequential nucleotide bases that encode at least a portion of a chemokine, or a variant thereof, or a RNA or DNA complementary thereto, that is complementary or hybridizes, respectively, to RNA or DNA encoding the chemokine and remains stably bound under stringent conditions, as defined by methods well known in the art, e.g., in Sambrook et al, supra.
  • the RNA or DNA is "isolated” in that it is free from at least one contaminating nucleic acid with which it is normally associated in the natural source of the RNA or DNA and is preferably substantially free of any other mammalian RNA or DNA.
  • the phrase "free from at least one contaminating source nucleic acid with which it is normally associated” includes the case where the nucleic acid is reintroduced into the source or natural cell but is in a different chromosomal location or is otherwise flanked by nucleic acid sequences not normally found in the source cell.
  • isolated chemokine nucleic acid is RNA or DNA that encodes human MCP-1 and shares at least about 80%>, preferably at least about 90%), and more preferably at least about 95%, sequence identity with the MCP-1 polypeptide having SEQ ID NO: 16.
  • recombinant nucleic acid or "preselected nucleic acid,” e.g., "recombinant DNA sequence or segment” or “preselected DNA sequence or segment” refers to a nucleic acid, e.g., to DNA, that has been derived or isolated from any appropriate tissue source, that may be subsequently chemically altered in vitro, so that its sequence is not naturally occurring, or corresponds to naturally occurring sequences that are not positioned as they would be positioned in a genome which has not been transformed with exogenous DNA.
  • An example of preselected DNA "derived” from a source would be a DNA sequence that is identified as a useful fragment within a given organism, and which is then chemically synthesized in essentially pure form.
  • DNA "isolated" from a source would be a useful DNA sequence that is excised or removed from said source by chemical means, e.g., by the use of restriction endonucleases, so that it can be further manipulated, e.g., amplified, for use in the invention, by the methodology of genetic engineering.
  • recovery or isolation of a given fragment of DNA from a restriction digest can employ separation of the digest on polyacrylamide or agarose gel by electrophoresis, identification of the fragment of interest by comparison of its mobility versus that of marker DNA fragments of known molecular weight, removal of the gel section containing the desired fragment, and separation of the gel from DNA.
  • Preselected DNA includes completely synthetic DNA sequences, semi-synthetic DNA sequences, DNA sequences isolated from biological sources, and DNA sequences derived from RNA, as well as mixtures thereof.
  • Nucleic acid molecules encoding amino acid sequence variants of a chemokine peptide are prepared by a variety of methods known in the art. These methods include, but are not limited to, isolation from a natural source (in the case of naturally occurring amino acid sequence variants) or preparation by oligonucleotide-mediated (or site-directed) mutagenesis, PCR mutagenesis, and cassette mutagenesis of an earlier prepared variant or a non- variant version of the chemokine peptide.
  • Oligonucleotide-mediated mutagenesis is a preferred method for preparing amino acid substitution variants of a chemokine peptide.
  • This technique is well known in the art as described by Adelman et al., DNA, 2, 183 (1983). Briefly, chemokine DNA is altered by hybridizing an oligonucleotide encoding the desired mutation to a DNA template, where the template is the single-stranded form of a plasmid or bacteriophage containing the unaltered or native DNA sequence of the chemokine. After hybridization, a DNA polymerase is used to synthesize an entire second complementary strand of the template that will thus inco ⁇ orate the oligonucleotide primer, and will code for the selected alteration in the chemokine DNA.
  • oligonucleotides of at least 25 nucleotides in length are used.
  • An optimal oligonucleotide will have 12 to 15 nucleotides that are completely complementary to the template on either side of the nucleotide(s) coding for the mutation. This ensures that the oligonucleotide will hybridize properly to the single-stranded DNA template molecule.
  • the oligonucleotides are readily synthesized using techniques known in the art such as that described by Crea et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S. A.. 75. 5765 (1 Q7S
  • the DNA template can be generated by those vectors that are either derived from bacteriophage Ml 3 vectors (the commercially available M13mpl8 and M13mpl9 vectors are suitable), or those vectors that contain a single- stranded phage origin of replication as described by Viera et al., Meth. Enzymol .. 153, 3 (1987). Thus, the DNA that is to be mutated may be inserted into one of these vectors to generate single-stranded template. Production of the single- stranded template is described in Sections 4.21-4.41 of Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, N.Y. 1989). Alternatively, single-stranded DNA template may be generated by denaturing double-stranded plasmid (or other) DNA using standard techniques.
  • the oligonucleotide is hybridized to the single- stranded template under suitable hybridization conditions.
  • a DNA polymerizing enzyme usually the Klenow fragment of DNA polymerase I, is then added to synthesize the complementary strand of the template using the oligonucleotide as a primer for synthesis.
  • a heteroduplex molecule is thus formed such that one strand of DNA encodes the mutated form of the chemokine, and the other strand (the original template) encodes the native, unaltered sequence of the chemokine.
  • This heteroduplex molecule is then transformed into a suitable host cell, usually a prokaryote such as E. coli JM101.
  • the cells are grown, they are plated onto agarose plates and screened using the oligonucleotide primer radiolabeled with 32-phosphate to identify the bacterial colonies that contain the mutated DNA.
  • the mutated region is then removed and placed in an appropriate vector for peptide or polypeptide production, generally an expression vector of the type typically employed for transformation of an appropriate host.
  • the method described immediately above may be modified such that a homoduplex molecule is created wherein both strands of the plasmid contain the mutations(s).
  • the modifications are as follows:
  • the single-stranded oligonucleotide is annealed to the single-stranded template as described above.
  • a mixture of three deoxyribonucleotides, deoxyriboadenosine (dATP), deoxyriboguanosine (dGTP), and deoxyribothymidine (dTTP) is combined with a modified thiodeoxyribocytosine called dCTP-( ⁇ S) (which can be obtained from the Amersham Co ⁇ oration). This mixture is added to the template- oligonucleotide complex.
  • this new strand of DNA will contain dCTP-( ⁇ S) instead of dCTP, which serves to protect it from restriction endonuclease digestion.
  • the template strand of the double-stranded heteroduplex is nicked with an appropriate restriction enzyme
  • the template strand can be digested with ExoIII nuclease or another appropriate nuclease past the region that contains the site(s) to be mutagenized.
  • the reaction is then stopped to leave a molecule that is only partially single-stranded.
  • a complete double-stranded DNA homoduplex is then formed using DNA polymerase in the presence of all four deoxyribonucleotide triphosphates, ATP, and DNA ligase. This homoduplex molecule can then be transformed into a suitable host cell such as E. coli JM101.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention is an isolated and purified DNA molecule comprising a preselected DNA segment encoding peptide 3 (1-12) [MCP-1] having SEQ ID NO:l, wherein the DNA segment comprises SEQ ID NO:76, or variants of SEQ ID NO:76, having nucleotide substitutions which are "silent" (see Figure 8). That is, when silent nucleotide substitutions are present in a codon, the same amino acid is encoded by the codon with the nucleotide substitution as is encoded by the codon without the substitution. For example, valine is encoded by the codon GTT, GTC, GTA and GTG.
  • a variant of SEQ ID NO:79 at the tenth codon in the mature polypeptide includes the substitution of GTI, GT ⁇ or GTG for GT£.
  • Other "silent" nucleotide substitutions in SEQ ID NO:76 which can encode peptide 3 (1-12)[MCP-1] having SEQ ID NO:l can be ascertained by reference to Figure 8 and page Dl in Appendix D in Sambrook et al, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (1989). Nucleotide substitutions can be introduced into DNA segments by methods well known to the art. See, for example, Sambrook et al., supra.
  • nucleic acid molecules encoding other mammalian, preferably human, chemokines may be modified in a similar manner.
  • an animal model is identified for a human disease.
  • Transgenic animal models for human disease may also be employed to identify agents useful in the methods of the invention.
  • models of chemokine-induced macrophage recruitment associated with human atherosclerosis include, but are not limited to, mice with a homozygous deletion of the apolipoprotein E (apoE) gene, mice overexpressing human apoB and Watanabe heritable hyperlipidemic rabbits.
  • models for autoimmune disease include the collagen-induced arthritis in DBA/1 mice and myelin basic protein- induced experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis.
  • Models for osteoporosis include ovariectomized female rats, mice, monkeys, rats treated with heparin or with glucocorticoids as well as suspension-induced osteoporosis in rats.
  • Models for HIV infection include infection of monkeys with SIV, SIV isolates, HIV or HIV isolates, SCID-Hu mice with HIV or HIV isolates, or rabbits with HIV or HIV isolates.
  • Other animal models for lenti viral infection include cats infected with FrV, horses with EIAV, and goats infected with CAEV (which is also an animal model for arthritis).
  • the efficacy of an agent of the invention for anti-inflammatory therapy may be assessed by measuring the extent of inflammation, or the extent of macrophage infiltration of affected tissues.
  • Macrophage infiltration can be detected by staining tissue sections with antibodies which specifically detect macrophages (e.g., mac-1 antiserum). Inflammation or other symptoms of disease may be detected by measuring appropriate clinical parameters, using techniques which are well known to those skilled in the art. For example, apoE knockout mice are treated with an agent, such as CRD-leu 4 ile ⁇ peptide 3, e.g., by intraperitoneal injection, for a period of twelve weeks, while control litter mates receive a suitable control peptide with no known biological activity.
  • an agent such as CRD-leu 4 ile ⁇ peptide 3
  • the animals are sacrificed and the effect of the agent is assessed by measuring the reduction in macrophage recruitment into the vessel wall by quantitative immunohistochemistry using mac-1 antiserum, and by measuring the reduction in the extent of vascular lipid lesion formation by histochemistry using oil red O staining in accordance with Paigen, Arteriosclerosis, 1Q, 316 (1990).
  • Apo(a) transgenic mice develop lesions when fed a lipid-rich diet. These lesions do not contain any macrophages.
  • C57B16 inbred mice develop lipid lesions of similar size and severity to those in apo(a) transgenic mice, but these lesions are rich in infiltrating macrophage.
  • Lesions of apo(a) mice, C57B16 mice, and 6 other strains of mice which develop lipid lesions rich with macrophage were screened by quantitative immunofluorescence for levels of pro-inflammatory mediators, e.g., TNF- ⁇ , MCP-1, MlP-l ⁇ , ILl ⁇ , ICAM-1, VCAM-1, and P-selectin.
  • TNF- ⁇ , MlP-l ⁇ , ILl ⁇ , ICAM-1, VCAM-1 and P- selectin were all expressed at identical levels in the apo(a) mouse lesions and the C57B16 lesions. Thus, while these pro-inflammatory mediators may be necessary to infiltration, they are not sufficient alone.
  • MCP- 1 was completely absent from the lesions of apo(a) mice, but expressed at high levels in lesions from all other mouse lines which had macrophage-rich lesions. Confocal microscopic analysis of sections of blood vessel wall with lesions triple stained with antibodies specific for SM- ⁇ -actin (smooth muscle cells; IA4 antibody), macrophages (Mac-1 antibodies) and MCP-1, showed that MCP-1 is not exclusively expressed by macrophage.
  • MCP-1 may be the missing "inflammatory mediator" in the apo(a) mouse model of atherosclerosis.
  • Chemokines other than MCP-1 may also be involved in macrophage recruitment, inflammation and pathogenesis of atherosclerosis, and in other diseases associated with inappropriate proliferation.
  • MlPl ⁇ has been implicated in the inappropriate inflammation in multiple sclerosis.
  • sequences analogous to peptide 2 and 3 from MlPl ⁇ may be particularly useful to treat or prevent multiple sclerosis. Therefore, when a particular chemokine is implicated in a particular disease, sequences from that particular chemokine may be especially useful to treat or prevent that disease.
  • Preferred agents falling within the scope of the invention are inhibitors of signaling of more than one chemokine, and preferably of all chemokines.
  • chemokine peptide analogs having sequences from a chemokine other than the one(s) associated with a particular disease process may be preferable to prepare chemokine peptide analogs having sequences from a chemokine other than the one(s) associated with a particular disease process.
  • Selection of a particular agent to treat a particular disease may be based on bioavailabihty, toxicity, DARC binding or other similar criteria.
  • Furukawa et al. (Lupus, 6, 193 (1997)), for systemic lupus; Suzuki et al. (J. Heart & T- ⁇ ng Transp1., 16, 1141 (1967)), Abbott et al. (Arch. Surg., £2, 645 (1964)), Cony et al. (TranspL, 16, 343 (1973)), Dworkin et al. f.T. Heart Lung Transp ID, 591 (1991)), Laden et al. (Arch. Path., 23, 240 (1972)) and Mitchell et al. (TranspL 42, 835 (1990)), for transplants; U.S. Patent No. 5,661,132 for wound healing; Burhardt et al. (Rheum.
  • the recombinant or preselected DNA sequence or segment may be circular or linear, double-stranded or single-stranded.
  • a preselected DNA sequence which encodes an RNA sequence that is substantially complementary to a mRNA sequence encoding a chemokine is typically a "sense" DNA sequence cloned into a cassette in the opposite orientation (i.e., 3' to 5' rather than 5' to 3').
  • the preselected DNA sequence or segment is in the form of chimeric DNA, such as plasmid DNA, that can also contain coding regions flanked by control sequences which promote the expression of the preselected DNA present in the resultant cell line.
  • chimeric means that a vector comprises DNA from at least two different species, or comprises DNA from the same species, which is linked or associated in a manner which does not occur in the "native" or wild type of the species.
  • a portion of the preselected DNA may be untranscribed, serving a regulatory or a structural function.
  • the preselected DNA may itself comprise a promoter that is active in mammalian cells, or may utilize a promoter already present in the genome that is the transformation target.
  • promoters include the CMV promoter, as well as the SV40 late promoter and retroviral LTRs (long terminal repeat elements), although many other promoter elements well known to the art may be employed in the practice of the invention.
  • Other elements functional in the host cells such as introns, enhancers, polyadenylation sequences and the like, may also be a part of the preselected DNA. Such elements may or may not be necessary for the function of the DNA, but may provide improved expression of the DNA by affecting transcription, stability of the mRNA, or the like. Such elements may be included in the DNA as desired to obtain the optimal performance of the transforming DNA in the cell.
  • Control sequences is defined to mean DNA sequences necessary for the expression of an operably linked coding sequence in a particular host organism.
  • the control sequences that are suitable for prokaryotic cells include a promoter, and optionally an operator sequence, and a ribosome binding site.
  • Eukaryotic cells are known to utilize promoters, polyadenylation signals, and enhancers.
  • "Operably linked” is defined to mean that the nucleic acids are placed in a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence.
  • DNA for a pre-sequence or secretory leader is operably linked to DNA for a peptide or polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein that participates in the secretion of the peptide or polypeptide; a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects the transcription of the sequence; or a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to facilitate translation.
  • "operably linked" means that the DNA sequences being linked are contiguous and, in the case of a secretory leader, contiguous and in reading phase. However, enhancers do not have to be contiguous. Linking is accomplished by ligation at convenient restriction sites. If such sites do not exist, the synthetic oligonucleotide adaptors or linkers are used in accord with conventional practice.
  • the preselected DNA to be introduced into the cells further will generally contain either a selectable marker gene or a reporter gene or both to facilitate identification and selection of transformed cells from the population of cells sought to be transformed.
  • the selectable marker may be carried on a separate piece of DNA and used in a co-transformation procedure.
  • Both selectable markers and reporter genes may be flanked with appropriate regulatory sequences to enable expression in the host cells.
  • Useful selectable markers are well known in the art and include, for example, antibiotic and herbicide-resistance genes, such as neo, hpt, dhfr, bar, aroA, dapA and the like. See also, the genes listed on Table 1 of Lundquist et al. (U.S. Patent No.
  • Reporter genes are used for identifying potentially transformed cells and for evaluating the functionality of regulatory sequences. Reporter genes which encode for easily assayable proteins are well known in the art.
  • a reporter gene is a gene which is not present in or expressed by the recipient organism or tissue and which encodes a protein whose expression is manifested by some easily detectable property, e.g., enzymatic activity.
  • Preferred genes include the chloramphenicol acetyl transferase gene (cat) from Tn9 of E. coli, the beta-glucuronidase gene (gus) of the uidA locus of E. coli, and the luciferase gene from firefly Photinus pyralis. Expression of the reporter gene is assayed at a suitable time after the DNA has been introduced into the recipient cells.
  • the recombinant DNA can be readily introduced into the host cells, e.g., mammalian, bacterial, yeast or insect cells by transfection with an expression vector comprising DNA encoding a chemokine or its complement, by any procedure useful for the introduction into a particular cell, e.g., physical or biological methods, to yield a transformed cell having the recombinant DNA stably integrated into its genome, so that the DNA molecules, sequences, or segments, of the present invention are expressed by the host cell.
  • the host cells e.g., mammalian, bacterial, yeast or insect cells by transfection with an expression vector comprising DNA encoding a chemokine or its complement
  • Physical methods to introduce a preselected DNA into a host cell include calcium phosphate precipitation, lipofection, particle bombardment, microinjection, electroporation, and the like.
  • Biological methods to introduce the DNA of interest into a host cell include the use of DNA and RNA viral vectors.
  • the main advantage of physical methods is that they are not associated with pathological or oncogenic processes of viruses. However, they are less precise, often resulting in multiple copy insertions, random integration, disruption of foreign and endogenous gene sequences, and unpredictable expression. For mammalian gene therapy, it is desirable to use an efficient means of precisely inserting a single copy gene into the host genome.
  • Viral vectors and especially retroviral vectors, have become the most widely used method for inserting genes into mammalian, e.g., human cells.
  • Other viral vectors can be derived from poxviruses, he ⁇ es simplex virus I, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses, and the like.
  • the term "cell line” or "host cell” is intended to refer to well-characterized homogenous, biologically pure populations of cells. These cells may be eukaryotic cells that are neoplastic or which have been “immortalized” in vitro by methods known in the art, as well as primary cells, or prokaryotic cells.
  • the cell line or host cell is preferably of mammalian origin, but cell lines or host cells of non-mammalian origin may be employed, including plant, insect, yeast, fungal or bacterial sources.
  • the preselected DNA sequence is related to a DNA sequence which is resident in the genome of the host cell but is not expressed, or not highly expressed, or, alternatively, over expressed.
  • Transfected or transformed is used herein to include any host cell or cell line, the genome of which has been altered or augmented by the presence of at least one preselected DNA sequence, which DNA is also referred to in the art of genetic engineering as “heterologous DNA,” “recombinant DNA,” “exogenous DNA,” “genetically engineered,” “non-native,” or “foreign DNA,” wherein said DNA was isolated and introduced into the genome of the host cell or cell line by the process of genetic engineering.
  • the host cells of the present invention are typically produced by transfection with a DNA sequence in a plasmid expression vector, a viral expression vector, or as an isolated linear DNA sequence.
  • the Transfected DNA is a chromosomally integrated recombinant DNA sequence, which comprises a gene encoding the chemokine or its complement, which host cell may or may not express significant levels of autologous or "native" chemokine.
  • assays include, for example, "molecular biological” assays well known to those of skill in the art, such as Southern and Northern blotting, RT-PCR and PCR; "biochemical” assays, such as detecting the presence or absence of a particular chemokine, e.g., by immunological means (ELISAs and Western blots) or by assays described hereinabove to identify agents falling within the scope of the invention.
  • “molecular biological” assays well known to those of skill in the art, such as Southern and Northern blotting, RT-PCR and PCR
  • biochemical assays, such as detecting the presence or absence of a particular chemokine, e.g., by immunological means (ELISAs and Western blots) or by assays described hereinabove to identify agents falling within the scope of the invention.
  • RNA produced from introduced preselected DNA segments may be employed.
  • PCR it is first necessary to reverse transcribe RNA into DNA, using enzymes such as reverse transcriptase, and then through the use of conventional PCR techniques amplify the DNA.
  • PCR techniques while useful, will not demonstrate integrity of the RNA product.
  • Further information about the nature of the RNA product may be obtained by Northern blotting. This technique demonstrates the presence of an RNA species and gives information about the integrity of that RNA. The presence or absence of an RNA species can also be determined using dot or slot blot Northern hybridizations. These techniques are modifications of Northern blotting and only demonstrate the presence or absence of an RNA species.
  • the present isolated, purified chemokine peptides, peptide variants or derivatives thereof, can be synthesized in vitro, e.g., by the solid phase peptide synthetic method or by recombinant DNA approaches (see above).
  • the solid phase peptide synthetic method is an established and widely used method, which is described in the following references: Stewart et al., Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis, W. H. Freeman Co., San Francisco (1969); Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Sod, Var2149 (1963); Meienhofer in "Hormonal Proteins and Peptides," ed.; CH. Li, Vol. 2 (Academic Press, 1973), pp.
  • amides of the chemokine peptide or chemokine peptide variants of the present invention may also be prepared by techniques well known in the art for converting a carboxylic acid group or precursor, to an amide.
  • a preferred method for amide formation at the C-terminal carboxyl group is to cleave the peptide from a solid support with an appropriate amine, or to cleave in the presence of an alcohol, yielding an ester, followed by amino lysis with the desired amine.
  • Salts of carboxyl groups of a peptide or peptide variant of the invention may be prepared in the usual manner by contacting the peptide with one or more equivalents of a desired base such as, for example, a metallic hydroxide base, e.g., sodium hydroxide; a metal carbonate or bicarbonate base such as, for example, sodium carbonate or sodium bicarbonate; or an amine base such as, for example, triethylamine, triethanolamine, and the like.
  • a desired base such as, for example, a metallic hydroxide base, e.g., sodium hydroxide
  • a metal carbonate or bicarbonate base such as, for example, sodium carbonate or sodium bicarbonate
  • an amine base such as, for example, triethylamine, triethanolamine, and the like.
  • N-acyl derivatives of an amino group of the chemokine peptide or peptide variants may be prepared by utilizing an N-acyl protected amino acid for the final condensation, or by acylating a protected or unprotected peptide.
  • O- acyl derivatives may be prepared, for example, by acylation of a free hydroxy peptide or peptide resin. Either acylation may be carried out using standard acylating reagents such as acyl halides, anhydrides, acyl imidazoles, and the like. Both N- and O-acylation may be carried out together, if desired.
  • Formyl-methionine, pyroglutamine and trimethyl-alanine may be substituted at the N-terminal residue of the peptide or peptide variant.
  • Other amino-terminal modifications include aminooxypentane modifications (see Simmons et al., Science, 226, 276 (1997)).
  • amino acid sequence of a chemokine peptide can be modified so as to result in a chemokine peptide variant.
  • the modification includes the substitution of at least one amino acid residue in the peptide for another amino acid residue, including substitutions which utilize the D rather than L form, as well as other well known amino acid analogs, e.g., unnatural amino acids such as ⁇ , ⁇ -disubstituted amino acids, N-alkyl amino acids, lactic acid, and the like.
  • analogs include phosphoserine, phosphothreonine, phosphotyrosine, hydroxyproline, gamma-carboxyglutamate; hippuric acid, octahydroindole-2-carboxylic acid, statine, l,2,3,4,-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3- carboxylic acid, penicillamine, ornithine, citruline, ⁇ -methyl-alanine, para- benzoyl-phenylalanine, phenylglycine, propargylglycine, sarcosine, e-N,N,N- trimethyllysine, e-N-acetyllysine, N-acetylserine, N-formylmethionine, 3- methylhistidine, 5-hydroxylysine, ⁇ -N-methylarginine, and other similar amino acids and imino acids and tert-butylglycine.
  • One or more of the residues of the peptide can be altered, so long as the peptide variant is biologically active.
  • the variant has at least about 10% of the biological activity of the corresponding non- variant peptide, e.g., a peptide having SEQ ID NO:l.
  • Conservative amino acid substitutions are preferred—that is, for example, aspartic-glutamic as acidic amino acids; lysine/arginine/histidine as basic amino acids; leucine/isoleucine, methionine/valine, alanine/valine as hydrophobic amino acids; serine/glycine/alanine/threonine as hydrophilic amino acids.
  • Conservative amino acid substitution also includes groupings based on side chains.
  • a group of amino acids having aliphatic side chains is glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, and isoleucine; a group of amino acids having aliphatic-hydroxyl side chains is serine and threonine; a group of amino acids having amide- containing side chains is asparagine and glutamine; a group of amino acids having aromatic side chains is phenylalanine, tyrosine, and tryptophan; a group of amino acids having basic side chains is lysine, arginine, and histidine; and a group of amino acids having sulfur-containing side chains is cysteine and methionine.
  • Amino acid substitutions falling within the scope of the invention are, in general, accomplished by selecting substitutions that do not differ significantly in their effect on maintaining (a) the structure of the peptide backbone in the area of the substitution, (b) the charge or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or (c) the bulk of the side chain.
  • Naturally occurring residues are divided into groups based on common side-chain properties:
  • hydrophobic norleucine, met, ala, val, leu, ile
  • neutral hydrophilic cys, ser, thr
  • Non-conservative substitutions entail exchanging a member of one of the classes described above for another.
  • Acid addition salts of the peptide or variant peptide or of amino residues of the peptide or variant peptide may be prepared by contacting the peptide or amine with one or more equivalents of the desired inorganic or organic acid, such as, for example, hydrochloric acid.
  • Esters of carboxyl groups of the peptides may also be prepared by any of the usual methods known in the art.
  • the agents of the invention e.g., chemokine peptides
  • One method to stabilize peptides is to prepare derivatives which are cyclized peptides (see EPA 471,453 (amide bonds), such as that between lysine and aspartic acid side chains; EPA 467,701 (disulfide bonds); EPA 467,699 (thioether bonds).
  • EPA 471,453 amide bonds
  • EPA 467,701 disulfide bonds
  • EPA 467,699 thioether bonds
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention is a chemokine peptide or variant that has been cyclized by addition of one or more cysteine residues to the N and/or C terminus of the peptide, as well as peptides which are constructed of the reverse sequence (i.e., reading C-terminal to N-terminal) of D-form amino acids.
  • a more preferred embodiment of this invention is a peptide which is both cyclized and constructed with the reverse sequence of D-form amino acids, i.e., a CRD derivative.
  • the invention includes antibodies specific for the therapeutic agents of the invention.
  • rabbits were immunized with CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • the resulting antisera had a high titer but did not cross react with MCP-1.
  • the antibodies may be useful in an immunoassay to detect CRD-Leu 4 Ile,,Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • Chemokine analogs have properties analogous to those of the corresponding peptide. These analogs can be referred to as “peptide mimetics” or “peptidomimetics” (Fauchere, J. (1986) Adv. Dm Res., 15:29; Veber and Freidinger (1985) TINS p. 392; and Evans et al. (1987) J. Med. Chem, 3Q:1229, which are inco ⁇ orated herein by reference) and can be developed with the aid of computerized molecular modeling.
  • a particularly preferred non- peptide linkage is -CH 2 NH- .
  • Such analogs may have greater chemical stability, enhanced pharmacological properties (half-life, abso ⁇ tion, potency, efficacy, etc.), altered specificity (e.g., a broad-spectrum of biological activities), reduced antigenicity, and be economically prepared.
  • Labeling of analogs usually involves covalent attachment of one or more labels, directly or through a spacer (e.g., an amide group), to non-interfering positions(s) on the analog that are predicted by quantitative structure-activity data and/or molecular modeling.
  • Such non-interfering positions generally are positions that do not form direct contacts with the macromolecule(s) to which the analog binds to produce the therapeutic effect.
  • Systematic substitution of one or more amino acids of a consensus sequence with a D-amino acid of the same type may also be used to generate more stable peptides.
  • Isosteres of chemokine tripeptides (a compound of formula (TV))
  • 2-cyclohexen-l-one Aldrich C 10,281-4
  • 2-cyclohexen-l-one can be reacted with lithium dimethylcuprate in the presence of trimethylsilyl chloride prior to use in the reaction, by methods well known to those skilled in the art (e.g., House et al., J. Org. Chem.. 4Q, 1460 (1975)).
  • a compound of formula 101 can alternatively be prepared by conversion of the above trimethylsilyl ether enolate to the ⁇ -hydroxy ketone followed by formation of the ester, using procedures which are well known in the art.
  • a compound of formula 101 can be alkylated, for example, with vinyl magnesium bromide under standard conditions, and dehydrated (for example, in the presence of molecular iodine and heat) to yield a diene of formula 102:
  • the cyclization reaction can be performed by mixing the compound of formula 102 and ethyl acrylate in a sealed tube and heating, essentially as described by Green et al. (Adv. Pest Control Res., 3, 129 (I960)). Oxidative cleavage of the double bond in a compound of formula 103 gives a diacid of formula 104.
  • Such an oxidative cleavage may conveniently be carried out by ozonolysis or by oxidation with an acid chromate.
  • an acid chromate for example, using CrO 3 in acid, the compound of formula 104 may be prepared, essentially as described by Eschen-moser & Winter, Science, 126, 1410 (1977).
  • An intermediate of formula 107 may conveniently be prepared from a protected tryptophan (for example, N- ⁇ -tBOC-N jn tBOC-L-tryptophan-OH; Novabiochem 04-12-0201) by reaction with the dianion derived of phenylmethylsulfone.
  • a protected tryptophan for example, N- ⁇ -tBOC-N jn tBOC-L-tryptophan-OH; Novabiochem 04-12-0201
  • reaction with a dithiol, such as 1,2-ethanedithiol forms a thioacetal which can be hydrolyzed in the presence of H 2 S under anhydrous conditions, to yield the thioketone.
  • Aryl substituents other than indolyl require preparation of suitably protected ⁇ -ketosulfone derivatives of the appropriate amino acid.
  • the reaction can be performed using the appropriate tBOC or Fmoc protected amino acid (phenylalanine and tyrosine, respectively), for example, from Novabiochem.
  • the suitably protected amino acid must first be prepared by methods well established in the art for synthesis of non-standard amino acids (for example, see Yuan and Hruby, Tetrahedron Lett., 3&, 3853 (1997)).
  • a compound of formula (V) can conveniently be prepared from an ester of formula 13. Deprotonation with lithium diisopropylamide followed by alkylation with bromide 14 gives a compound of formula 15. Selective reduction of the ester, for example with
  • a compound of formula (XIII) can be prepared as shown in the following scheme.
  • a compound of formula (XIV) can be prepared from Yohimbine using procedures similar to those known in the art. As illustrated in Example 23, treatment of yohimbine with sodamide provides the corresponding amide of formula (XIV) wherein R ⁇ is amino. Further alkylation or acylation of this amide using standard conditions provides other compounds of formula (XIV).
  • a compound of formula (X) wherein R 3 and R 4 form a ring can be prepared using the following general scheme.
  • a compound of formula 114 can be used as a starting material for preparing other compounds of formula (X).
  • a compound of formula (X) wherein R 3 and R 4 form a ring can also be prepared using the following general scheme.
  • Chemokine peptides, variants, analogs or derivatives thereof may be targeted to a specific therapeutic site by linking the therapeutic agent to a moiety that specifically binds to a cellular component, e.g., antibodies or fragments thereof, lectins, transferrin (for liver targeting) and small molecule drugs, so * as to form a therapeutic conjugate.
  • a cellular component e.g., antibodies or fragments thereof, lectins, transferrin (for liver targeting) and small molecule drugs.
  • Targeting of the therapeutic agents of the invention can result in increased concentration of the therapeutic agent at a specific anatomic location.
  • the linking of a therapeutic agent of the invention to a binding moiety may increase the stability of the therapeutic agent in vivo.
  • an anti-CD4 mimetic that binds to the CD4 receptor may be linked to a therapeutic agent of the invention so as to result in a therapeutic conjugate, a portion of which binds to the HIV co-receptor. This may enhance the ability to target the therapeutic agent to a particular cell type and thus block HIV infection of that cell type.
  • anti-tumor antibodies such as NR-LU-10 (anti-carcinoma), NR-ML-5 (anti-melanoma), or anti-CD45 (anti-lymphoma), may be useful to localize the therapeutic agent to a particular type of tumor.
  • antibodies which recognize a pathogen-specific epitope such as mAb 17. 41 (Cryptosporidium parvum) may be employed.
  • anti-synovium or chondroitin sulfate e.g., Catalog No. C8035, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • antibodies to the bronchial epithelium may be useful to prepare immunoconjugates for use in the methods of the invention.
  • antibodies useful in targeting a therapeutic agent of the invention to a specific site or cell type include antibodies specific for blood vessels or lymphatics (e.g., Ulex europaeus-I lectin, Catalog No. TJ4754, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO), blood clots or platelets (e.g., Catalog Nos. F9902, F4639, F2506, F8512, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO), T cells (e.g., Catalog Nos. C7048 (CD3); C1805 (CD4); C7173 (CD5); and C7298 (CD7), Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO), brain (e.g., Catalog Nos. S2644 and S2407, Sigma Chemical Co., St.
  • blood vessels or lymphatics e.g., Ulex europaeus-I lectin, Catalog No. TJ4754, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • blood clots or platelets e.g., Catalog Nos. F9902,
  • tumors e.g., Catalog No. C2331, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • epithelial cells e.g., Catalog Nos. E6011 and C1041, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • fibroblasts e.g., Catalog Nos. F4771 and V4630, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • macrophage e.g., Catalog No. M1919, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • stomach lumen e.g., Catalog No. M5293, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • neutrophils e.g., Catalog Nos. N1890 and N1765, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO
  • tendons e.g., Catalog No.
  • E4013, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO skin (e.g., Catalog No. K4252, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) mammary tissue or epithelium (e.g., Catalog No. C6930, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO) and skeletal muscle (e.g., Catalog Nos. D8281 and D1033, Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, MO).
  • an antibody or fragment thereof having a specificity for a surface antigen on a malignant cell or virus-infected is attached to a therapeutic agent of the invention.
  • a chemokine peptide or variant thereof is attached via peptide bonds to the carboxyl termini regions, e.g., CH3, of antibody heavy chains.
  • the immunoconjugates can be prepared by genetic engineering techniques, i.e, by forming a nucleic acid construct encoding the chimeric immunoconjugate.
  • the gene construct encoding the immunoconjugate includes, in 5' to 3' orientation, a DNA segment which encodes a heavy chain variable region, a DNA segment encoding the heavy chain constant region, and a DNA segment coding for the chemokine peptide, peptide variant, or repeats thereof.
  • the fused gene is inserted into an expression vector for transfection of the appropriate recipient cells where it is expressed.
  • the hybrid chain can be combined with a light (or heavy) chain counte ⁇ art to form monovalent and divalent immunoconjugates.
  • the heavy chain constant region for the conjugates can be selected from any of the five isotypes: alpha, delta, epsilon, gamma or mu.
  • Heavy chains or various subclasses can be used.
  • the light chains can have either a kappa or lambda constant chain. DNA sequences for these immunoglobulin regions are well known in the art (see, e.g., Gillies et al., Immunol. Meth. r 121, 191 (1989)).
  • variable region is derived from an antibody specific for the target antigen (an antigen associated with a diseased cell such as a cancer cell or virus-infected cell), and the constant region includes the CHI, CH2 and CH3 domains.
  • the gene encoding the chemokine peptide or variant is joined, e.g., by appropriate linkers, e.g., by DNA encoding (Gly 4 -Ser) 3 in frame to the 3' end of the gene encoding the constant region (e.g., CH3 exon), either directly or through an intergenic region.
  • the intergenic region can comprise a nucleotide sequence coding for a proteolytic cleavage site.
  • This site inte ⁇ osed between the immunoglobulin and the chemokine peptide or variant, can be designed to provide for proteolytic release of the chemokine peptide or variant at the target site.
  • plasmin and trypsin cleave after lysine and arginine residues at sites that are accessible to the proteases.
  • Many other site-specific endoproteases and the amino acid sequences they attack are well known.
  • the nucleic acid construct can include the endogenous promoter and enhancer for the variable region-encoding gene to regulate expression of the chimeric immunoglobulin chain.
  • variable region encoding genes can be obtained as DNA fragments comprising the leader peptide, the VJ gene (functionally rearranged variable (V) regions with joining (J) segment) for the light chain or VDJ gene for heavy chain, and the endogenous promoter and enhancer for these genes.
  • the gene coding for the variable region can be obtained apart from endogenous regulatory elements and used in an expression vector which provides these elements.
  • Variable region genes can be obtained by standard DNA cloning procedures from cells that produce the desired antibody. Screening of the genomic library for a specific functionally rearranged variable region can be accomplished with the use of appropriate DNA probes such as DNA segments containing the J region DNA sequence and sequences downstream.
  • variable regions can be obtained generally from Ig-producing lymphoid cells.
  • hybridoma cell lines producing Ig specific for tumor associated antigens or viral antigens can be produced by standard somatic cell hybridization techniques. These Ig-producing cell lines provide the source of variable region genes in functionally rearranged form.
  • the variable region genes are typically of murine origin because the murine system lends itself to the production of a wide variety of Igs of desired specificity.
  • the DNA fragment containing the functionally rearranged variable region gene is linked to a DNA fragment containing the gene encoding the desired constant region (or a portion thereof).
  • Ig constant regions can be obtained from antibody-producing cells by standard gene cloning techniques. Genes for the two classes of human light chains and the five classes of human heavy chains have been cloned, and thus, constant regions of human origin are readily available from these clones.
  • the fused gene encoding the hybrid IgH chain is assembled or inserted into expression vectors for inco ⁇ oration into a recipient cell.
  • the introduction of gene construct into plasmid vectors can be accomplished by standard gene splicing procedures.
  • the chimeric IgH chain can be co-expressed in the same cell with a corresponding L chain so that a complete immunoglobulin can be expressed and assembled simultaneously.
  • the heavy and light chain constructs can be placed in the same or separate vectors.
  • Recipient cell lines are generally lymphoid cells.
  • the prefened recipient cell is a myeloma (or hybridoma).
  • Myelomas can synthesize, assemble, and secrete immunoglobulins encoded by transfected genes and they can glycosylate polypeptide.
  • a particularly preferred recipient cell is the Sp2/0 myeloma which normally does not produce endogenous immunoglobulin. When transfected, the cell will produce only Ig encoded by the transfected gene constructs.
  • Transfected myelomas can be grown in culture or in the peritoneum of mice where secreted immunoconjugate can be recovered from ascites fluid. Other lymphoid cells such as B lymphocytes can be used as recipient cells.
  • lymphoid cells There are several methods for transfecting lymphoid cells with vectors containing the nucleic acid constructs encoding the chimeric Ig chain.
  • a preferred way of introducing a vector into lymphoid cells is by spheroblast fusion (see Gillies et al, Biotechnol., 2, 798-804 ( 1989)).
  • Alternative methods include electroporation or calcium phosphate precipitation.
  • RNA sequence encoding the construct and its translation in an appropriate in vivo or in vitro system.
  • Methods for purifying recombinant immunoglobulins are well known.
  • a well known method of purifying antibodies involves protein A purification because of the propensity of protein A to bind the Fc region of antibodies.
  • the antigen binding activity of the purified immunoconjugates can then be measured by methods well known to the art, such as described in Gillies et al. (J. Immunol. Methol., 125., 191 (1989)).
  • immunoconjugate activity can be determined using antigen-coated plates in either a direct binding or competition assay format.
  • humanized antibodies are prepared and then assayed for their ability to bind antigen.
  • Methods to determine the ability of the humanized antibodies to bind antigen may be accomplished by any of numerous known methods for assaying antigen-antibody affinity.
  • the murine antibody NR-LU-13 binds an approximately 40 kilodalton glycoprotein expressed on numerous carcinomas. This antigen has been characterized in Varki et al., Cancer Res., 44, 681 (1984); Okabe et al., Cancer Res., 44, 5273 (1989). Thus, it is routine to test the ability of humanized antibodies to bind the NR-LU-13 antigen.
  • Humanized antibodies are useful tools in methods for therapeutic pu ⁇ oses.
  • Methods for utilizing the humanized antibodies can be found, for example, in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,877,868, 5,175,343, 5,213,787, 5,120,526, and 5,202,169.
  • VSMC binding proteins e.g., polypeptides or carbohydrates, proteoglycans and the like, that are associated with the cell membranes of vascular smooth muscle cells can be employed to prepare therapeutic conjugates.
  • the binding moiety is exemplified by chondroitin sulfate proteoglycans (CSPGs) synthesized by vascular smooth muscle cells and pericytes, and a discrete portion (termed an epitope herein) of the CSPG molecule having an apparent molecular weight of about 250 kD is especially preferred.
  • the 250 kD target is an N-linked glycoprotein that is a component of a larger 400 kD proteoglycan complex.
  • a vascular smooth muscle binding protein is provided by NR-AN-01 monoclonal antibody (a subculture of NR-ML-05) that binds to an epitope in a vascular smooth muscle CSPG target molecule.
  • the monoclonal antibody designated NR-ML-05 reportedly binds a 250 kD CSPG synthesized by melanoma cells (Morgan et al, U.S. Pat. No. 4,897,255). Smooth muscle cells and pericytes also reportedly synthesize a 250 kD CSPG as well as other CSPGs.
  • NR-ML-05 binding to smooth muscle cells has been disclosed (Fritzberg et al., U.S. Pat. No.
  • NR-ML-05 No. 85-41-4I-A2, freeze # A2106, has been deposited with the American Type Culture Collection, Rockville, MD and granted Accession No. HB-9350.
  • NR-ML-05 is the parent of, and structurally and functionally equivalent to, subclone NR-AN-01, disclosed herein. It will be recognized that NR-AN-01 is just one example of a vascular smooth muscle binding protein that specifically associates with the 400 kD CSPG target, and that other binding proteins associating with this target and other epitopes in this target are also useful in the therapeutic conjugates and methods of the invention.
  • murine monoclonal antibody may be "chimerized” by genetically recombining the nucleotide sequence encoding the murine Fv region (i.e., containing the antigen binding sites) with the nucleotide sequence encoding a human constant domain region and an Fc region, e.g., in a manner similar to that disclosed in European Patent Application No. 0,411,893 A2.
  • Humanized vascular smooth muscle binding partners will be recognized to have the advantage of decreasing the immunoreactivity of the antibody or polypeptide in the host recipient, which may thereby be useful for increasing the in vivo half-life and reducing the possibility of adverse immune reactions. See also, N. Lonberg et al. (U.S. Patent Nos. 5,625,126; 5,545,806; and 5,569,825); and Surani et al. (U.S. Patent No. 5,545,807).
  • Useful binding peptides for cancer treatment embodiments of the present invention include those associated with cell membrane and cytoplasmic epitopes of cancer cells and the like.
  • binding peptides localize to the surface membrane of intact cells and internal epitopes of disrupted cells, respectively, and deliver the therapeutic agent for assimilation into the target cells.
  • Minimal peptides, mimetic organic compounds and human or humanized antibodies that localize to the requisite tumor cell types are also useful as binding peptides of the present invention.
  • binding peptides may be identified and constructed or isolated in accordance with known techniques.
  • Preferred binding peptides of these embodiments of the present invention bind to a target epitope with an association constant of at least about 10 "6 M.
  • Coupled methods for linking the therapeutic agent through covalent or non-covalent bonds to the targeting moiety include chemical cross-linkers and heterobifunctional cross-linking compounds (i.e., "linkers") that react to form a bond between reactive groups (such as hydroxyl, amino, amido, or sulfhydryl groups) in a therapeutic agent and other reactive groups (of a similar nature) in the targeting moiety.
  • reactive groups such as hydroxyl, amino, amido, or sulfhydryl groups
  • This bond may be, for example, a peptide bond, disulfide bond, thioester bond, amide bond, thioether bond, and the like.
  • conjugates of monoclonal antibodies with drugs have been summarized by Morgan and Foon (Monoclonal Antibody Therapy to Cancer: Preclinical Models and Investigations, Basic and Clinical Tumor Immunology, Vol. 2, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Hingham, MA) and by TJhr. J. of Tmmunnl. 133:i-vii, 1 84).
  • the conjugate contains a radionuclide cytostatic agent
  • the therapeutic conjugate contains a vascular smooth muscle binding protein coupled covalently to a chemokine peptide or variant.
  • the covalent bond of the linkage may be formed between one or more amino, sulfhydryl, or carboxyl groups of the vascular smooth muscle binding protein and the chemokine peptide or variant.
  • an antibody conjugate is used in pretargeting methods. Essentially, such pretargeting methods are characterized by an improved targeting ratio or increased absolute dose to the target cell sites in comparison to conventional cancer diagnosis or therapy. A general description of pretargeting methods may be found in U.S. Patent No. 4,863,713, 5,578,287, and 5,630,996. Typical pretargeting approaches are summarized below.
  • Pretargeting methods are of two general types: three-step pretargeting methods and two-step pretargeting methods.
  • a three-step pretargeting protocol includes the administration of a targeting moiety-ligand conjugate, which is allowed to localize at a target site and to dilute in the circulation. This is followed by administration of an anti-ligand which binds to the targeting moiety- ligand conjugate and clears unbound targeting moiety-ligand conjugate from the blood, as well as binds to targeting moiety-ligand conjugate at the target site.
  • the anti-ligand fulfills a dual function by clearing targeting moiety-ligand conjugate not bound to the target site as well as attaches to the target site to form a targeting moiety-ligand : anti-ligand complex.
  • a therapeutic agent- ligand conjugate that exhibits rapid whole body clearance is administered.
  • the anti-ligand portion of the complex binds to the ligand portion of the circulating therapeutic agent-ligand conjugate, thus producing a targeting moiety-ligand : anti-ligand : ligand-therapeutic agent "sandwich" at the target site.
  • the unbound therapeutic agent is attached to a rapidly clearing ligand (rather than a slowly clearing targeting moiety, such as antibody or antibody fragment), this technique provides decreased non-target exposure to the active agent.
  • two-step pretargeting methods eliminate the step of administering the above identified anti-ligand.
  • These "two-step” procedures feature targeting moiety-ligand or targeting moiety-anti-ligand administration, followed by the administration of a therapeutic agent which is conjugated to the opposite member of the ligand/anti-ligand pair.
  • ligand or anti- ligand designed specifically to provide a clearance function, is administered to facilitate the clearance of circulating targeting moiety-ligand or targeting moiety- anti-ligand.
  • the clearing agent does not become bound to the target cell population, either directly or through the previously administered target cell bound targeting moiety-anti-ligand or targeting moiety-ligand conjugate.
  • a targeting moiety in a pretargeting method binds to a defined target cell population, such as tumor cells.
  • Preferred targeting moieties useful in this regard are antibodies (polyclonal or monoclonal), such as human monoclonal antibodies, or "humanized” murine or chimeric antibodies.
  • Some examples of humanized antibodies include those that are CHO produced, produced in hosts such as plant (for example corn, soybean, tobacco, and the like), insect, mammalian, yeast, and bacterial.
  • the humanized antibodies may be those that bind to the antigen bound by antibody NR-LU-13.
  • the humanized antibody may not possess N-linked glycosylation or its N-linked glycosylation has been modified post expression to reduce immunogenicity or toxicity.
  • Ligand anti-ligand pairs suitable for use in targeting protocols include biotin/avidin or streptavidin, haptens and epitopes/antibody, fragments or analogs thereof, including mimetics, lectins/carbohydrates, zinc finger proteins/dsDNA fragments, enzyme inhibitors/enzymes; and analogs and derivatives thereof.
  • Preferred ligands and anti-ligands bind to each other with an affinity of at least about K A ⁇ 10 9 M _1 or K D ⁇ 10 "9 M.
  • Biotin/avidin or streptavidin is a preferred ligand/anti-ligand pair.
  • such pretargeting methods preferably include the administration of an anti-ligand that provides a clearance function.
  • the clearance is probably attributable to cross-linking and/or aggregation of conjugates that are circulating in the blood, which leads to complex/aggregate clearance by the recipient's RES (reticuloendothehal system).
  • the anti-ligand clearance of this type is preferably accomplished with a multivalent molecule. However, a univalent molecule of sufficient size to be cleared by the RES on its own could also be employed.
  • receptor-based clearance mechanisms e.g., Ashwell receptor or other receptors
  • hexose residues such as galactose or mannose residues
  • Such clearance mechanisms are less dependent upon the valency of the clearing agent than the RES complex/aggregate clearance mechanisms described above.
  • a clearing agent should not be necessary.
  • Preferred clearing agents are disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • a suitable dosage ranges from about 10 to about 2500 mg, more preferably from about 50 to 1500 mg, and most preferably from about 100 to 800 mg.
  • the dosage of the ligand-therapeutic agent conjugate generally ranges from about 0.001 to about 10 mg and more preferably from about 0.1 to 2 mg.
  • such pretargeting methods include the administration of a clearing agent.
  • the dosage of the clearing agent is an amount which is sufficient to substantially clear the previously administered conjugate from the circulation, i.e., at least about 50%, more preferably at least about 90%, and most preferably approaching or at 100%.
  • the clearing agent is administered several days after administration of the humanized antibody - streptavidin conjugate, preferably about 1 to 5 days after, more preferably at least about 1 to 2 days after.
  • the determination of when to administer the clearing agent depends on the target uptake and endogenous clearance of targeting moiety conjugate.
  • Particularly prefened clearing agents are those which provide for Ashwell receptor mediated clearance, such as galactosylated proteins, e.g., galactosylated biotinylated human serum albumin (HS A) and small molecule clearing agents containing galactose and biotin.
  • galactosylated proteins e.g., galactosylated biotinylated human serum albumin (HS A) and small molecule clearing agents containing galactose and biotin.
  • HS A galactosylated biotinylated human serum albumin
  • small molecule clearing agents containing galactose and biotin.
  • a typical dosage of the clearing agent will range from about 100 to 1000 mg, and more preferably about 200-500 mg.
  • the ligand-therapeutic agent conjugate is preferably administered about 2 to 12 hours after.
  • the conjugates may be administered by known methods of administration.
  • Known methods of administration include, by way of example, intraperitoneal injection, intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, intranasal administration, among others. Intravenous administration is generally preferred. TTT.
  • Indications Amenable to Treatment by the Agents of the Invention
  • the agents of the invention are useful to treat a mammal afflicted with, to inhibit in a mammal at risk of, or to augment in a mammal at risk of, an indication associated with chemokine-induced activity, such as aberrant or pathological inflammatory processes.
  • the chemokines participate in a broad range of inflammatory processes, both physiological and pathological.
  • broad specificity chemokine inhibitors may be useful to treat or prevent a wide range of inflammatory diseases.
  • the use of rationally designed chemokine inhibitors i.e., inhibitors with relative specificity for various chemokines, may reduce or inhibit side-effects associated with chronic therapies of broad spectrum chemokine inhibitors.
  • these inhibitors may be designed to treat particular diseases, thereby minimizing side effects resulting from disrupting unrelated physiological processes.
  • Atherosclerosis Development of atherosclerosis is a complex process involving smooth muscle cells, endothelial cells and inflammatory cells, and, in particular, monocyte-derived tissue macrophages, B or T cells.
  • endothelial cells Once endothelial cells are activated, they express adhesion molecules important for the extravasation of inflammatory cells. For example, in the TGF ⁇ l knockout (-/-) mouse, the absence of this cytokine resulted in endothelial cell activation.
  • the activated endothelial cells express, among other adhesion molecules, E-selectin, P-selectin, and ICAM-1, which in turn participate in the extravasation of leukocytes.
  • chemokines were also expressed at the sites of incipient vascular lesions. TNF- ⁇ , IL-1, as well as several chemokines including IL-8 and MCP-1, have been detected at elevated levels in atherosclerotic lesions. Results described hereinabove show that the chemokine MCP-1 in particular plays a role in atherosclerotic vascular inflammation.
  • macrophages secrete an excess of matrix-degrading enzymes (such as the matrix metalloproteinases) over their inhibitors, resulting in the loss of extracellular matrix (ECM) in the macrophage- rich shoulder and fibrous cap regions, a common feature of unstable or ruptured plaques; and macrophage-derived foam cells become necrotic, possibly in response to toxic oxidative metabolites of lipids, resulting in a lipid-filled extracellular pool which further destabilizes the local vessel wall architecture.
  • matrix-degrading enzymes such as the matrix metalloproteinases
  • ECM extracellular matrix
  • macrophage-derived foam cells become necrotic, possibly in response to toxic oxidative metabolites of lipids, resulting in a lipid-filled extracellular pool which further destabilizes the local vessel wall architecture.
  • Inhibitors of chemokine action, and in particular inhibitors of MCP-1 may improve plaque stability and thus rapidly reduce the risk of myocardial infarction, without necessarily reducing the total atheros
  • agents of the invention may decrease lipid lesion formation and/or lipid lesion progression as well as increasing plaque stability (Boring et al, Nature, 394, 894 (1998)).
  • agents of the invention e.g., peptide 3(1- 12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l), KQK, peptide 3[7-12] (SEQ ID NO:9), as well as variants, e.g., Leu 4 Ile u peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:14), or derivatives thereof (e.g.
  • NR58,4, Y-II, and L-II may be useful to treat and/or prevent unstable angina pectoris, atherosclerosis, as well as other diseases characterized by local or systemic vasculitis, as well as the symptoms and diseases which occur secondarily to the vessel wall inflammation such as myocardial infarction.
  • the agents of the invention are also useful in combination with lipid lowering agents, such as the statins, or TGF-beta elevating agents (see, for example, WO 96/40098, the disclosure of which is inco ⁇ orated by reference herein).
  • Osteoporosis Low bone mineral density, often categorized as osteoporosis, results from an imbalance between bone matrix deposition by osteoblasts and its subsequent reso ⁇ tion by osteoclasts. The balance between these two dynamic processes determines bone density.
  • One strategy to increase bone density has been the use of analogs of tamoxifen, such as raloxifene, which mimic the effects of estrogen on bone and thus, promote osteoblast ' differentiation (increasing bone matrix deposition) and inhibit osteoclast recruitment (decreasing reso ⁇ tion).
  • An alternative strategy is to decrease matrix reso ⁇ tion by directly inhibiting the mechanism by which osteoclasts are recruited to the bone.
  • Bone matrix degradation products such as the N-terminal and C-terminal telopeptides of collagen as well as pyridinium cross-links
  • osteoclasts are continuously recruited to bone as precursor cells which circulate in the monocyte fraction, and which may be identical to monocytes. Once recruited, the precursors differentiate into osteoclasts which then resorb matrix until they die by apoptosis. Thus, the number of osteoclasts in bone tissue (and hence the osteoclast activity) can be rapidly regulated by modulating the osteoclast recruitment process.
  • monocyte recruitment into bone is a molecular parallel of the pathological monocyte recruitment into the blood vessel wall that occurs during atherogenesis.
  • the chemokine MCP-1 is implicated in both processes.
  • MCP-1 inhibitors may act to reduce monocyte recruitment and thus decrease osteoclast recruitment and/or decrease the number of cells differentiating into osteoclasts, which would result in a rapid increase in bone density, for example, over a period of weeks rather than years.
  • the ability of the present therapeutic agents to increase bone density contrasts with existing drugs which prevent a further decrease in bone density but do not increase bone density.
  • peptide 3 e.g., peptide 3(7-12)[MCP-1], and variants (e.g., Leu 4 Ile intuitionpeptide 3(1-12)[MCP- 1]) and derivatives (e.g., C-RD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile ⁇ pe ⁇ tide 3(3-12)[MCP-l]) thereof, may be useful to inhibit or prevent low bone density.
  • derivatives with specificity for CC chemokines, such as KQK analogs and the WAQ analogs are preferred agents for the treatment of osteoporosis. HTV Infection and ATDS.
  • HIV isolates In addition to the CD4 receptor, additional cell surface molecules (termed co-receptors) are required for the productive infection of a cell by HIV isolates. HIV isolates can be divided into two subtypes, which depend on whether they can infect monocyte/macrophages (M-tropic strains) or helper T lymphocytes (T-tropic strains). Experiments with chemokine ligands suggest that the chemokine receptors function as the HIV co-receptors: MlPl ⁇ and RANTES inhibited the infection of monocytes with M-tropic strains (but not infection of T-cells by T-tropic strains), while SDF-1 inhibited T cell infection (but not monocyte infection).
  • MIPl /RANTES receptor CCR-5 is the HIV co-receptor on monocytes while the SDF-1 receptor CXCR-4 (also termed LESTR and fusin) is the co-receptor on T-cells.
  • SDF-1 receptor CXCR-4 also termed LESTR and fusin
  • M-tropic virus predominates, a virus which is non-syncytium forming, less virulent and does not deplete T-cells.
  • selection favors conversion to the more virulent, syncytium forming T- tropic strain, a strain which depletes helper T cells and leads to acquired immunodeficiency (AIDS).
  • AIDS acquired immunodeficiency
  • the agent preferably inhibits virus binding to more than one receptor, i.e., an agent would have to have broad specificity for chemokine receptors.
  • Genetic studies have identified a mutation in CCR5 which renders individuals essentially immune to HIV infection. This mutation, termed CCR5 ⁇ 32, results in a truncated mRNA for CCR-5. The expression of the truncated CCR-5 does not produce any detectable CCR-5 protein on the cell surface.
  • inhibitors of chemokine receptors such as peptide 3, its variants, analogs or derivatives, may inhibit HIV infection as these agents have broad specificity.
  • peptide 3 [MCP-1] inhibited HIV binding and infection of Jurkat cells and macrophage.
  • a preferred agent to prevent or inhibit HIV infection and/or replication is CRD- Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile n peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • peptide 3, its variants, analogs or derivatives, e.g., CRD-Cys ⁇ Leu lenpeptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] may be especially useful to inhibit infection of M-tropic strains of HIV.
  • Peptide 2, its variants, analogs or derivatives are also useful to prevent or inhibit HIV infection and/or replication, as peptide 2 inhibited HIV replication in T cells and macrophage.
  • Preferred therapeutic agents have decreased Duffy binding and increased co-receptor affinity (in at least about the nM range) (see Example 5) relative to the corresponding chemokine or peptide having the native or wild-type sequence.
  • Peptide 2, its variants, analogs or derivatives, e.g., LRD derivatives are useful to inhibit T-tropic strains of HIV.
  • a combination of peptide 3, its variants, analogs or derivatives, and peptide 2, its variants, analogs or derivatives may be particularly useful to prevent or treat HIV infection.
  • these agents are useful for the treatment, as well as the prevention, of both HIV seropositives and of progression of seropositive patients to AIDS, when used, either alone, in combination, or in combination with other anti-viral therapies.
  • an infected individual is pre-treated with viral inhibitors (such as a cocktail of reverse transcriptase and viral protease inhibitors) and then given doses of a general chemokine inhibitor, preferably peptide 3, peptide 2, their variants or derivatives, more preferably peptide 2[MIPl ⁇ ], its analogs or derivatives.
  • chemokine agonists and/or antagonists target the susceptible cell rather than the virus itself. Although the virus can rapidly mutate to generate strains resistant to the virus-targeted agents, cells mutate less readily and are under less or no selective pressure to mutate.
  • chemokine co-receptor The extent to which the mutations in the H1N virus must occur to circumvent the use of a chemokine co-receptor is likely to be much greater than the mutations necessary to render a reverse transcriptase resistant to a reverse transcriptase inhibitor. Thus, the administration of chemokine analogs is likely to prove effective either alone or in combination with the virus-targeted therapies. Furthermore, chemokine inhibitors may have limited side effects in vivo, i.e., limited physiological impact, and therefore have a good therapeutic index when used in vivo.
  • Stroke Inflammatory processes have been implicated in the pathophysiology of stroke or cerebral ischemia. The effects of the inflammatory response following stroke are detrimental, thus, there is a benefit afforded by preventing or inhibiting the inflammatory response.
  • Activated neutrophils promote cerebral ischaemic injury by vascular plugging and by production of cytotoxic substances.
  • the early post ischemic recruitment and influx of vascular leukocytes, mainly neutrophils, into the brain represents a therapeutic target for the agents of the invention.
  • Selective chemokine expression by central nervous system cells is important for post-ischaemic vascular leukocyte targeting, e.g., MCP-1 as well as other chemokines are upregulated in the central nervous system of stroke patients.
  • Psoriasis is an inflammatory disorder that is associated with MCP-1 and monocyte recruitment.
  • Topical application of a therapeutic agent of the invention, e.g., peptide 3 is preferred to prevent or treat psoriasis as this delivery method reduces bioavailabihty problems.
  • Derivatives of the therapeutic agents of the invention, e.g., CRD peptides, which are administered topically may exhibit enhanced bioavailabihty relative to non-derivatized counte ⁇ arts.
  • psoriasis may be treated by systemic admimstration of an agent of the invention such as for example, CRD-Leu4IlellCysl3-peptide 3(3-13)[MCP- l], NR58,4, Y-II, and L-II).
  • an agent of the invention such as for example, CRD-Leu4IlellCysl3-peptide 3(3-13)[MCP- l], NR58,4, Y-II, and L-II).
  • Autoimmune Diseases are characterized by inappropriate activation of the immune system, orchestrated by autoreactive leukocytes. Although it remains unclear what factors lead to the initial inappropriate recognition of self-antigens, a number of pro-inflammatory cytokines have been implicated in the continuing inflammation which underlies the tissue destruction that, in turn, leads to the morbidity and mortality associated with these diseases. Of these inflammatory cytokines, TNF- ⁇ and the chemokines (in particular MlP-l ⁇ ) have been implicated.
  • MlP-l ⁇ expression is detected in experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis, a model of T-cell mediated autoimmune disease with some common characteristics to human multiple sclerosis. Elevated MlPl activity is also detected in the cerebrospinal fluid of patients with multiple sclerosis.
  • Antibody therapy to reduce chemokine levels has been shown to be effective in animal models of autoimmune diseases, but this method exhibits tachyphalaxis and only lowers chemokine levels for a short period, and is unlikely to be useful in human therapy.
  • a general antagonist of chemokine signaling is likely to suppress the inappropriate inflammation indefinitely.
  • peptide 3 may be useful to prevent and or treat autoimmune disorders including, but not limited to, type I diabetes, multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis and systemic lupus erythematosus.
  • chemokine expression patterns may be associated with different autoimmune disorders, and hence each autoimmune disease may require a different derivative or variant of peptide 3.
  • MlPl ⁇ may play a central role in multiple sclerosis.
  • MlPl ⁇ is a CC chemokine.
  • the administration of a CC-selective agent of the invention can be used to treat multiple sclerosis (e.g., KQK compounds, compounds of formula (V), or Ser 7 Glu g Glu 9 peptide 3(l-12)[MCP-l]).
  • CXC chemokines such as IL-8 play an important role in neutrophil attraction to the wound site, and that inhibition of IL-8 production reduces both neutrophil accumulation and subsequent scarring.
  • blocking CC chemokines have similarly shown that they have a role in the attraction of macrophages to the wound site, and these cells may also promote rapid healing at the expense of wound quality.
  • inhibition of either CXC or CC chemokines, or both may result in a decrease in the wound-induced inflammatory reaction, and in turn promote a balance between fast healing and good restoration of dermal architecture.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention is the topical application of a therapeutic agent of the invention that inhibits chemokine action at the site of the wound.
  • a broad spectrum chemokine inhibitor such as peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1], Leu 4 Ile, .peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1], CRD-Leu 4 -Ile increasinglypeptide 3 [MCP-1], NR58,4, Y- II, L-II, or WVQ, or combinations thereof may be administered.
  • a selective inhibitor of IL-8 such as KEN, or a selective inhibitor of MCP-1, such as KQK, as well as combinations thereof may be administered.
  • a combination of a broad spectrum inhibitor and a selective inhibitor may be administered.
  • the various components of the wound-induced inflammatory process may be controlled as desired and the wound may be allowed to heal more slowly (under conditions where it is protected from infection, e.g., by simultaneous use of antibiotics) but with enhanced recovery of dermal architecture. See U.S. Patent No. 5,202,118 for methods to determine the efficacy of an agent to treat or enhance wound healing.
  • Hypertension is a risk factor for atherosclerosis.
  • a rabbit model is employed. New Zealand white rabbits are fed an atherogenic diet for three weeks to induce plaque formation. One half of each group of rabbits is administered an agent of the invention. Aortic coarctation is created in one group of the rabbits by wrapping a Dacron band around the midportion of the descending thoracic aorta (stenosis group). Another group of rabbits undergo the banding technique without aortic constriction. Yet another group of rabbits serve as nonoperated controls.
  • Monocyte binding to the aortic endothelial surface is determined with epifluorescent microscopy on standard aortic segments proximal and distal to the band. Immunohistochemistry is performed using the following antibodies:VCAM-l, RAM11, CD1 lb, and factor VIII.
  • VCAM-l aorta proximal to the stenosis
  • monocyte adhesion and endothelial VCAM-1 expression are increased, with intimal thickening and accumulation of macrophage.
  • agent-treated rabbits monocyte adhesion and endothelial VCAM-1 expression, intimal thickening and accumulation of macrophage are decreased relative to non-agent-treated rabbits.
  • agents of the invention may be useful to ameliorate the vascular remodeling which accompanies, and may cause, human hypertension. It is preferred, however, that agents of the invention that are used to treat hypertension have little or no adrenoreceptor binding. Thus, prefened agents for treating hypertension may exclude compounds of formula (XIV).
  • Basophil-mediated diseases Asthma is a disease characterized by hyper- reactive airways and chronic inflammation resulting from an influx of many cell types and inflammatory mediators. The interaction and causal effects of all the inflammatory mediators in asthma is not entirely understood. MCP-1 can play a role in asthma through several different effector functions such as: monocyte recruitment, basophil recruitment, lymphocyte recruitment, monocyte activation or by triggering the release of histamine from basophils or resident mast cells (Bischoff et al. r J. Exp. Med.. 175(5), 1271 (1992)). Inhibition of these processes are likely to reduce the severity of the disease. Allergic diseases, like asthma, are manifested through a complex interaction of inflammatory mediators including monocytes/macrophages, lymphocytes and histamine release from mast cells and basophils.
  • a preferred mode for administration of a therapeutic agent of the invention to treat or inhibit the symptoms associated with asthma is by inhalation.
  • the DARC specificity of the therapeutic agent is less important for administration to the respiratory tract than for other modes of administration.
  • Endo toxemia Endotoxemia is an acute systemic illness often mediated by LPS, a major component in the cell wall of gram-negative bacteria. LPS stimulates the release of proinflammatory cytokines. MCP-1 and MCP-2 are expressed in endotoxemia and exert their effect by recruiting leukocytes to target organs.
  • preferred peptides for use in this embodiment of the invention are MCP-1 and MCP-2 peptides.
  • Myocardial Tnfarction/Acute Ischemia Myocardial infarction is the result of acute closure of a coronary vessel usually due to thrombosis secondary to rupture of an atherosclerotic plaque.
  • the damage to the adjacent myocardium and resultant heart failure is secondary to the period of ischemia and the damage caused during the reperfusion period.
  • Reperfusion injuries are associated with increased oxygen free radicals and inflammatory mediators.
  • MCP-1 is up- regulated during the reperfusion period and is a key inflammatory mediator (Kumar et al., Circulation, 2Q, 1427 (1994); Kumar et al., Circulation, 25, 693 (1997)).
  • Rheumatoid Arthritis Rheumatoid arthritis is a multi-systemic inflammatory disease involving primarily the joints but also the skin, blood vessels, heart, lung and muscle. The characteristic pathology of rheumatoid arthritis involves the accumulation of non-suppurative inflammatory cell infiltrate consisting of macrophages and lymphocytes within the joint. MCP-1 is produced by both synovial cells and infiltrating monocyte/macrophages in rheumatoid arthritis and is thought to contribute to the accumulation of inflammatory cells within the joint.
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention including a compound of formula (I)-(XV) and (XIX), including their salts, are preferably administered so as to achieve serum levels of about 0.01 pM to about 100 nM, more preferably at doses of about 0.01 pM to about 5 nM, and even more preferably at doses of about 0.1 pM to about 2 nM, of the therapeutic agent.
  • the agent may be administered at dosages of at least about 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg, more preferably about 0.1 to about 50 mg/kg, and even more preferably about 0.1 to about 30 mg/kg, of body weight, although other dosages may provide beneficial results.
  • the amount administered will vary depending on various factors including, but not limited to, the agent chosen, the disease, whether prevention or treatment is to be achieved, and if the agent is modified for bioavailabihty and in vivo stability.
  • Administration of sense or antisense nucleic acid molecule may be accomplished through the introduction of cells transformed with an expression cassette comprising the nucleic acid molecule (see, for example, WO 93/02556) or the administration of the nucleic acid molecule (see, for example, Feigner et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,580,859, Pardoll et al, Immunity, 3, 165 (1995); Stevenson et al, Tmmunol. Rev-- 145, 211 (1995); Moiling, J. Mol. Med., 25, 242 (1997); Donnelly et al., Ann. N.Y- Acad. Sci., 222, 40 (1995); Yang et al., Mol. Med.
  • compositions, dosages and routes of administration for nucleic acids are generally disclosed, for example, in Feigner et al., supra.
  • the amount of therapeutic agent administered is selected to treat a particular indication.
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention are also amenable to chronic use for prophylactic pu ⁇ oses, preferably by systemic administration.
  • Administration of the therapeutic agents in accordance with the present invention may be continuous or intermittent, depending, for example, upon the recipient's physiological condition, whether the pu ⁇ ose of the administration is therapeutic or prophylactic, and other factors known to skilled practitioners.
  • the administration of the agents of the invention may be essentially continuous over a preselected period of time or may be in a series of spaced doses. Both local and systemic administration is contemplated.
  • One or more suitable unit dosage forms comprising the therapeutic agents of the invention can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, or parenteral, including by rectal, buccal, vaginal and sublingual, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intrathoracic, intrapulmonary and intranasal routes.
  • the formulations may, where appropriate, be conveniently presented in discrete unit dosage forms and may be prepared by any of the methods well known to pharmacy. Such methods may include the step of bringing into association the therapeutic agent with liquid carriers, solid matrices, semi-solid carriers, finely divided solid carriers or combinations thereof, and then, if necessary, introducing or shaping the product into the desired delivery system.
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention are prepared for oral administration, they are preferably combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient to form a pharmaceutical formulation, or unit dosage form.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier diluent or excipient to form a pharmaceutical formulation, or unit dosage form.
  • the total active ingredients in such formulations comprise from 0.1 to 99.9% by weight of the formulation.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable it is meant the carrier, diluent, excipient, and/or salt must be compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation, and not deleterious to the recipient thereof.
  • the active ingredient for oral administration may be present as a powder or as granules; as a solution, a suspension or an emulsion; or in achievable base such as a synthetic resin for ingestion of the active ingredients from a chewing gum.
  • the active ingredient may also be presented as a bolus, electuary or paste.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, douches, lubricants, foams or sprays containing, in addition to the active ingredient, such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Formulations suitable for rectal administration may be presented as suppositories.
  • compositions containing the therapeutic agents of the invention can be prepared by procedures known in the art using well known and readily available ingredients.
  • the agent can be formulated with common excipients, diluents, or carriers, and formed into tablets, capsules, suspensions, powders, and the like.
  • excipients, diluents, and carriers that are suitable for such formulations include the following fillers and extenders such as starch, sugars, mannitol, and silicic derivatives; binding agents such as carboxymethyl cellulose, HPMC and other cellulose derivatives, alginates, gelatin, and polyvinyl-pyrrolidone; moisturizing agents such as glycerol; disintegrating agents such as calcium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate; agents for retarding dissolution such as paraffin; reso ⁇ tion accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds; surface active agents such as cetyl alcohol, glycerol monostearate; adso ⁇ tive carriers such as kaolin and bentonite; and lubricants such as talc, calcium and magnesium stearate, and solid polyethyl glycols.
  • fillers and extenders such as starch, sugars, mannitol, and silicic derivatives
  • binding agents such as carboxymethyl cellulose, HPMC and other
  • tablets or caplets containing the agents of the invention can include buffering agents such as calcium carbonate, magnesium oxide and magnesium carbonate.
  • Caplets and tablets can also include inactive ingredients such as cellulose, pregelatinized starch, silicon dioxide, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose, magnesium stearate, microcrystalline cellulose, starch, talc, titanium dioxide, benzoic acid, citric acid, corn starch, mineral oil, polypropylene glycol, sodium phosphate, and zinc stearate, and the like.
  • Hard or soft gelatin capsules containing an agent of the invention can contain inactive ingredients such as gelatin, microcrystalline cellulose, sodium lauryl sulfate, starch, talc, and titanium dioxide, and the like, as well as liquid vehicles such as polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and vegetable oil.
  • enteric coated caplets or tablets of an agent of the invention are designed to resist disintegration in the stomach and dissolve in the more neutral to alkaline environment of the duodenum.
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention can also be formulated as elixirs or solutions for convenient oral administration or as solutions appropriate for parenteral administration, for instance by intramuscular, subcutaneous or intravenous routes.
  • the pharmaceutical formulations of the therapeutic agents of the invention can also take the form of an aqueous or anhydrous solution or dispersion, or alternatively the form of an emulsion or suspension.
  • the therapeutic agent may be formulated for parenteral administration (e.g., by injection, for example, bolus injection or continuous infusion) and may be presented in unit dose form in ampules, pre-filled syringes, small volume infusion containers or in multi-dose containers with an added preservative.
  • the active ingredients may take such forms as suspensions, solutions, or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.
  • the active ingredients may be in powder form, obtained by aseptic isolation of sterile solid or by lyophilization from solution, for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile, pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • formulations can contain pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles and adjuvants which are well known in the prior art. It is possible, for example, to prepare solutions using one or more organic solvent(s) that is/are acceptable from the physiological standpoint, chosen, in addition to water, from solvents such as acetone, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, glycol ethers such as the products sold under the name "Dowanol”, polyglycols and polyethylene glycols, C,-C 4 alkyl esters of short-chain acids, preferably ethyl or isopropyl lactate, fatty acid triglycerides such as the products marketed under the name "Miglyol", isopropyl myristate, animal, mineral and vegetable oils and polysiloxanes.
  • organic solvent(s) that is/are acceptable from the physiological standpoint, chosen, in addition to water, from solvents such as acetone, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, glycol ethers such as the products sold under the name "Dowanol”, polyg
  • compositions according to the invention can also contain thickening agents such as cellulose and or cellulose derivatives. They can also contain gums such as xanthan, guar or carbo gum or gum arabic, or alternatively polyethylene glycols, bentones and montmorillonites, and the like.
  • an adjuvant chosen from antioxidants, surfactants, other preservatives, film-forming, keratolytic or comedolytic agents, perfumes and colorings.
  • other active ingredients may be added, whether for the conditions described or some other condition.
  • t-butylhydroquinone t-butylhydroquinone
  • butylated hydroxyanisole butylated hydroxytoluene and ⁇ -tocopherol and its derivatives
  • the galenical forms chiefly conditioned for topical application take the form of creams, milks, gels, dispersion or microemulsions, lotions thickened to a greater or lesser extent, impregnated pads, ointments or sticks, or alternatively the form of aerosol formulations in spray or foam form or alternatively in the form of a cake of soap.
  • the agents are well suited to formulation as sustained release dosage forms and the like.
  • the formulations can be so constituted that they release the active ingredient only or preferably in a particular part of the intestinal or respiratory tract, possibly over a period of time.
  • the coatings, envelopes, and protective matrices may be made, for example, from polymeric substances, such as polylactide-glycolates, liposomes, microemulsions, microparticles, nanoparticles, or waxes. These coatings, envelopes, and protective matrices are useful to coat indwelling devices, e.g., stents, catheters, peritoneal dialysis tubing, and the like.
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention can be delivered via patches for transdermal administration. See U.S. Patent No.
  • Patches for transdermal delivery can comprise a backing layer and a polymer matrix which has dispersed or dissolved therein a therapeutic agent, along with one or more skin permeation enhancers.
  • the backing layer can be made of any suitable material which is impermeable to the therapeutic agent.
  • the backing layer serves as a protective cover for the matrix layer and provides also a support function.
  • the backing can be formed so that it is essentially the same size layer as the polymer matrix or it can be of larger dimension so that it can extend beyond the side of the polymer matrix or overlay the side or sides of the polymer matrix and then can extend outwardly in a manner that the surface of the extension of the backing layer can be the base for an adhesive means.
  • the polymer matrix can contain, or be formulated of, an adhesive polymer, such as polyacrylate or acrylate/vinyl acetate copolymer.
  • an adhesive polymer such as polyacrylate or acrylate/vinyl acetate copolymer.
  • Examples of materials suitable for making the backing layer are films of high and low density polyethylene, polypropylene, polyurethane, polyvinylchloride, polyesters such as poly(ethylene phthalate), metal foils, metal foil laminates of such suitable polymer films, and the like.
  • the materials used for the backing layer are laminates of such polymer films with a metal foil such as aluminum foil. In such laminates, a polymer film of the laminate will usually be in contact with the adhesive polymer matrix.
  • the backing layer can be any appropriate thickness which will provide the desired protective and support functions.
  • a suitable thickness will be from about 10 to about 200 microns.
  • those polymers used to form the biologically acceptable adhesive polymer layer are those capable of forming shaped bodies, thin walls or coatings through which therapeutic agents can pass at a controlled rate.
  • Suitable polymers are biologically and pharmaceutically compatible, nonallergenic and insoluble in and compatible with body fluids or tissues with which the device is contacted. The use of soluble polymers is to be avoided since dissolution or erosion of the matrix by skin moisture would affect the release rate of the therapeutic agents as well as the capability of the dosage unit to remain in place for convenience of removal.
  • Exemplary materials for fabricating the adhesive polymer layer include polyethylene, polypropylene, polyurethane, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ethylene/ethylacrylate copolymers, ethylene/vinyl acetate copolymers, silicone elastomers, especially the medical-grade polydimethylsiloxanes, neoprene rubber, polyisobutylene, polyacrylates, chlorinated polyethylene, polyvinyl chloride, vinyl chloride- vinyl acetate copolymer, crosslinked polymethacrylate polymers (hydrogel), polyvinylidene chloride, poly(ethylene terephthalate), butyl rubber, epichlorohydrin rubbers, ethylenvinyl alcohol copolymers, ethylene- vinyloxyethanol copolymers; silicone copolymers, for example, polysiloxane- polycarbonate copolymers, polysiloxanepolyethylene oxide copolymers, polysiloxane-polymeth
  • a biologically acceptable adhesive polymer matrix should be selected from polymers with glass transition temperatures below room temperature.
  • the polymer may, but need not necessarily, have a degree of crystallinity at room temperature.
  • Cross-linking monomeric units or sites can be inco ⁇ orated into such polymers.
  • cross-linking monomers can be inco ⁇ orated into polyacrylate polymers, which provide sites for cross-linking the matrix after dispersing the therapeutic agent into the polymer.
  • Known cross-linking monomers for polyacrylate polymers include polymethacrylic esters of polyols such as butylene diacrylate and dimethacrylate, trimethylol propane trimethacrylate and the like. Other monomers which provide such sites include allyl acrylate, allyl methacrylate, diallyl maleate and the like.
  • a plasticizer and/or humectant is dispersed within the adhesive polymer matrix.
  • Water-soluble polyols are generally suitable for this pu ⁇ ose. Inco ⁇ oration of a humectant in the formulation allows the dosage unit to absorb moisture on the surface of skin which in turn helps to reduce skin irritation and to prevent the adhesive polymer layer of the delivery system from failing.
  • Therapeutic agents released from a transdermal delivery system must be capable of penetrating each layer of skin.
  • a transdermal drug delivery system In order to increase the rate of permeation of a therapeutic agent, a transdermal drug delivery system must be able in particular to increase the permeability of the outermost layer of skin, the stratum corneum, which provides the most resistance to the penetration of molecules.
  • the fabrication of patches for transdermal delivery of therapeutic agents is well known to the art.
  • the therapeutic agents of the invention are conveniently delivered from an insufflator, nebulizer or a pressurized pack or other convenient means of delivering an aerosol spray.
  • Pressurized packs may comprise a suitable propellant such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount.
  • the composition may take the form of a dry powder, for example, a powder mix of the therapeutic agent and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
  • a powder mix of the therapeutic agent and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
  • the powder composition may be presented in unit dosage form in, for example, capsules or cartridges, or, e.g., gelatine or blister packs from which the powder may be administered with the aid of an inhalator, insufflator or a metered-dose inhaler.
  • the therapeutic agent may be administered via nose drops, a liquid spray, such as via a plastic bottle atomizer or metered- dose inhaler.
  • atomizers are the Mistometer (Wintrop) and the Medihaler (Riker).
  • the local delivery of the therapeutic agents of the invention can also be by a variety of techniques which administer the agent at or near the site of disease. Examples of site-specific or targeted local delivery techniques are not intended to be limiting but to be illustrative of the techniques available.
  • Examples include local delivery catheters, such as an infusion or indwelling catheter, e.g., a needle infusion catheter, shunts and stents or other implantable devices, site specific carriers, direct injection, or direct applications.
  • local delivery catheters such as an infusion or indwelling catheter, e.g., a needle infusion catheter, shunts and stents or other implantable devices, site specific carriers, direct injection, or direct applications.
  • the therapeutic agents may be formulated as is known in the art for direct application to a target area.
  • Conventional forms for this pu ⁇ ose include wound dressings, coated bandages or other polymer coverings, ointments, creams, lotions, pastes, jellies, sprays, and aerosols, as well as in toothpaste and mouthwash, or by other suitable forms, e.g., via a coated condom.
  • Ointments and creams may, for example, be formulated with an aqueous or oily base with the addition of suitable thickening and/or gelling agents.
  • Lotions may be formulated with an aqueous or oily base and will in general also contain one or more emulsifying agents, stabilizing agents, dispersing agents, suspending agents, thickening agents, or coloring agents.
  • the active ingredients can also be delivered via iontophoresis, e.g., as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,140,122; 4,383,529; or 4,051,842.
  • the percent by weight of a therapeutic agent of the invention present in a topical formulation will depend on various factors, but generally will be from 0.01%> to 95% of the total weight of the formulation, and typically 0.1-25% by weight.
  • the above-described formulations can be adapted to give sustained release of the active ingredient employed, e.g., by combination with certain hydrophilic polymer matrices, e.g., comprising natural gels, synthetic polymer gels or mixtures thereof.
  • Drops such as eye drops or nose drops, may be formulated with an aqueous or non-aqueous base also comprising one or more dispersing agents, solubilizing agents or suspending agents.
  • Liquid sprays are conveniently delivered from pressurized packs. Drops can be delivered via a simple eye dropper-capped bottle, or via a plastic bottle adapted to deliver liquid contents dropwise, via a specially shaped closure.
  • the therapeutic agent may further be formulated for topical administration in the mouth or throat.
  • the active ingredients may be formulated as a lozenge further comprising a flavored base, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the composition in an inert base such as gelatin and glycerin or sucrose and acacia; mouthwashes comprising the composition of the present invention in a suitable liquid carrier; and pastes and gels, e.g., toothpastes or gels, comprising the composition of the invention.
  • compositions described herein may also contain other ingredients such as antimicrobial agents, or preservatives.
  • active ingredients may also be used in combination with other therapeutic agents, for example, oral contraceptives, bronchodilators, anti-viral agents e.g., ddl, ddC, AZT, protease inhibitors, or any combination thereof, steroids, leukotriene inhibitors, cyclosporin A, methotrexate, azathioprene, anti-IgE, Enbrel, Xenapax and the like.
  • Sustained Released Dosage Forms for example, oral contraceptives, bronchodilators, anti-viral agents e.g., ddl, ddC, AZT, protease inhibitors, or any combination thereof, steroids, leukotriene inhibitors, cyclosporin A, methotrexate, azathioprene, anti-IgE, Enbrel, Xenapax and the like.
  • Sustained release dosage forms of the invention may comprise microparticles and or nanoparticles having a therapeutic agent dispersed therein.
  • the therapeutic dosage forms of this aspect of the present invention may be of any configuration suitable for sustained release.
  • Preferred sustained release therapeutic dosage forms exhibit one or more of the following characteristics:
  • microparticles e.g., from about 0.5 micrometers to about 100 micrometers in diameter, with about 0.5 to about 2 micrometers more preferred; or from about 0.01 micrometers to about 200 micrometers in diameter, preferably from about 0.5 to about 50 micrometers, and more preferably from about 2 to about 15 micrometers
  • nanoparticles e.g., from about 1.0 nanometer to about 1000 nanometers in diameter, with about 50 to about 250 nanometers being more preferred; or from about 0.01 nanometer to about 1000 nanometers in diameter, preferably from about 50 to about 200 nanometers
  • free flowing powder structure e.g., from about 0.5 micrometers to about 100 micrometers in diameter, with about 0.5 to about 2 micrometers more preferred; or from about 0.01 micrometers to about 200 micrometers in diameter, preferably from about 0.5 to about 50 micrometers, and more preferably from about 2 to about 15 micrometers
  • nanoparticles e.g., from about 1.0 nanometer to about 1000
  • - biodegradable structure designed to biodegrade over a period of time preferably between from about 0.5 to about 180 days, preferably from about 1-3 to about 150 days, or from about 3 to about 180 days, with from about 10 to about 21 days more preferred; or non-biodegradable structure to allow therapeutic agent diffusion to occur over a time period of between from about 0.5 to about 180 days, more preferably from about 30 to about 120 days; or from about 3 to about 180 days, with from about 10 to about 21 days preferred;
  • - facilitate a stable and reproducible dispersion of therapeutic agent therein, preferably to form a therapeutic agent-polymer matrix, with active therapeutic agent release occurring by one or both of the following routes: (1) diffusion of the therapeutic agent through the dosage form (when the therapeutic agent is soluble in the shaped polymer or polymer mixture defining the dimensions of the dosage form); or (2) release of the therapeutic agent as the dosage form biodegrades; and/or - for targeted dosage forms, capability to have, preferably, from about 1 to about 10,000 binding protein/peptide to dosage form bonds and more preferably, a maximum of about 1 binding peptide to dosage form bond per 150 square angstroms of particle surface area. The total number of binding protein/peptide to dosage form bonds depends upon the particle size used.
  • the binding proteins or peptides are capable of coupling to the particles of the therapeutic dosage form through covalent ligand sandwich or non-covalent modalities as set forth herein.
  • Nanoparticle sustained release therapeutic dosage forms are preferably biodegradable and, optionally, bind to the vascular smooth muscle cells and enter those cells, primarily by endocytosis.
  • the biodegradation of the nanoparticles occurs over time (e.g., 30 to 120 days; or 10 to 21 days) in prelysosomic vesicles and lysosomes.
  • Preferred larger microparticle therapeutic dosage forms of the present invention release the therapeutic agents for subsequent target cell uptake with only a few of the smaller microparticles entering the cell by phagocytosis.
  • a target cell assimilates and metabolizes a dosage form of the present invention depends on the mo ⁇ hology, physiology and metabolic processes of those cells.
  • the size of the particle sustained release therapeutic dosage forms is also important with respect to the mode of cellular assimilation. For example, the smaller nanoparticles can flow with the interstitial fluid between cells and penetrate the infused tissue. The larger microparticles tend to be more easily trapped interstitially in the infused primary tissue, and thus are useful to therapeutic agents.
  • Preferred sustained release dosage forms of the present invention comprise biodegradable microparticles or nanoparticles. More preferably, biodegradable microparticles or nanoparticles are formed of a polymer containing matrix that biodegrades by random, nonenzymatic, hydrolytic scissioning to release therapeutic agent, thereby forming pores within the particulate structure.
  • Polymers derived from the condensation of alpha hydroxycarboxylic acids and related lactones are preferred for use in the present invention.
  • a particularly preferred moiety is formed of a mixture of thermoplastic polyesters (e.g., polylactide or polyglycolide) or a copolymer of lactide and glycolide components, such as poly(lactide-co-glycolide).
  • thermoplastic polyesters e.g., polylactide or polyglycolide
  • a copolymer of lactide and glycolide components such as poly(lactide-co-glycolide).
  • An exemplary structure, a random poly(DL-lactide-co-glycolide), is shown below, with the values of x and y being manipulable by a practitioner in the art to achieve desirable microparticle or nanoparticle properties.
  • agents suitable for forming particulate dosage forms of the present invention include polyorthoesters and polyacetals (Polymer Letters, 1£:293 (1980) and polyorthocarbonates (U.S. Patent No. 4,093,709) and the like.
  • Preferred lactic acid/glycolic acid polymer containing matrix particles of the present invention are prepared by emulsion-based processes, that constitute modified solvent extraction processes, see, for example, processes described by Cowsar et al., "Poly(Lactide-Co-Glycolide) Microcapsules for Controlled Release of Steroids," Methods Enzymology, 112:101-116, 1985 (steroid entrapment in microparticles); Eldridge et al., "Biodegradable and Biocompatible Poly(DL-Lactide-Co-Glycolide) Microspheres as an Adjuvant for Staphylococcal Enterotoxin B Toxoid Which Enhances the Level of Toxin- Neutralizing Antibodies," 52:2978-2986, 1991 (toxoid entrapment); Cohen et al., “Controlled Delivery Systems for Proteins Based on Poly(Lactic/Glycolic Acid) Microspheres," Pharmaceutical Research, £( ⁇ ):713- 720
  • the procedure for forming particle dosage forms of the present invention involves dissolving the polymer in a halogenated hydrocarbon solvent, dispersing a therapeutic agent solution (preferably aqueous) therein, and adding an additional agent that acts as a solvent for the halogenated hydrocarbon solvent but not for the polymer.
  • the polymer precipitates out from the polymer- halogenated hydrocarbon solution onto droplets of the therapeutic agent containing solution and entraps the therapeutic agent.
  • the therapeutic agent is substantially uniformly dispersed within the sustained release dosage form of the present invention.
  • they are washed and hardened with an organic solvent. Water washing and aqueous nonionic surfactant washing steps follow, prior to drying at room temperature under vacuum.
  • particulate dosage forms characterized by a therapeutic agent dispersed in the matrix of the particles, are sterilized prior to packaging, storage or administration. Sterilization may be conducted in any convenient manner therefor.
  • the particles can be irradiated with gamma radiation, provided that exposure to such radiation does not adversely impact the structure or function of the therapeutic agent dispersed in the therapeutic agent-polymer matrix or the binding protein/peptide attached thereto. If the therapeutic agent or binding protein/peptide is so adversely impacted, the particle dosage forms can be produced under sterile conditions.
  • the biodegradation rate directly effects the kinetics of therapeutic agent release.
  • the biodegradation rate is regulable by alteration of the composition or structure of the sustained release dosage form.
  • alteration of the lactide/glycolide ratio in preferred dosage forms of the present invention can be conducted, as described by Tice et al., "Biodegradable Controlled-Release Parenteral Systems," Pharmaceutical Technology, pp. 26-35, 1984; by inclusion of agents that alter the rate of polymer hydrolysis, such as citric acid and sodium carbonate, as described by Kent et al., "Microencapsulation of Water Soluble Active Polypeptides," U.S.
  • Patent No. 4,675,189 by altering the loading of therapeutic agent in the lactide/glycolide polymer, the degradation rate being inversely proportional to the amount of therapeutic agent contained therein, by judicious selection of an appropriate analog of a common family of therapeutic agents that exhibit different potencies so as to alter said core loadings; and by variation of particle size, as described by Beck et al, "Poly(DL-Lactide-Co- Glycolide)/Norethisterone Microcapsules: An Injectable Biodegradable Contraceptive," Biol- Reprod , 22:186-195, 1983, or the like. All of the aforementioned methods of regulating biodegradation rate influence the intrinsic viscosity of the polymer containing matrix, thereby altering the hydration rate thereof.
  • the preferred lactide/glycolide structure is biocompatible with the mammalian physiological environment.
  • these preferred sustained release dosage forms have the advantage that biodegradation thereof forms lactic acid and glycolic acid, both normal metabolic products of mammals.
  • Functional groups required for binding of the protein/peptide to the particle dosage form are optionally included in or on the particle matrix and are attached to the non-degradable or biodegradable polymeric units.
  • Functional groups that are useful for this pu ⁇ ose include those that are reactive with peptides, e.g., carboxyl groups, amine groups, sulfhydryl groups and the like.
  • Preferred binding enhancement moieties include the terminal carboxyl groups of the preferred (lactide-glycolide) polymer containing matrix or the like.
  • SPS semi- permeable surface
  • Serum or other protein-containing samples can be injected directly onto an SPS column (e.g., SPS-C18 with a column size of 4.6 mm x 250 mm; using a mobile phase: A: 0.1% TFA in water, B: 0.1% TFA in acetonitrile: 0-5 min - 5% B, 5-30 min - 60% B, 30-40 min - 5% B detector; 215 nm).
  • the outer phase of the column forms a semipermeable surface that prevents large molecules from reaching the inner phase. Small molecules penetrate the semipermeable surface and interact with the inner reversed phase.
  • Standards of peptide 3 (range of 1.5 ⁇ g/ml to 1000 ⁇ g/ml) in PBS were injected and a standard curve was created. 20 ⁇ l of serum and urine were injected and the areas under the peptide 3 peaks were obtained. The concentration was then calculated from the standard curve. This method can detect at least about 20 ⁇ g/ml of a peptide in physiological fluid samples.
  • the peptides of the invention may also be detected and or quantitated in physiological fluid, e.g., urine or serum, using LC-MS.
  • physiological fluid e.g., urine or serum
  • LC-MS LC-MS
  • electrospray ionization ESI
  • an LCQ ion trap mass spectrometer Thermoquest Finnigan, San Jose, CA
  • the sheath gas flow rate is set to 55 units, while the auxiliary gas is turned off.
  • the data are acquired with a maximum ion time of 500 ms and 1 total microscan.
  • the analysis is performed using a full scan MS with m/z [335-1400] and/or a full scan MS/MS with m/z [280-1500] generated by fragmentation of the doubly charged ion with m/z 680.1 set to an isolation width of 2.0 amu and a collisional energy of 28%.
  • HPLC grade solvents 'Baker Analyzed' from J.T. Baker, Phillipsburg, NJ
  • formic acid 99%>, ACS, Sigma, St. Louis, MO
  • a Zorbax Eclipse XDB-C18 3.0 x 150 mm, 3.5 micron ('Zorbax', Hewlett-Packard, Palo Alto, CA) equipped with a 'SafeGuard' guard column containing a C18 cartridge (Phenomenex, Torrence, CA) is operated at a column temperature of 35 °C and a maximum pressure of 400 bar.
  • the flow rate is set to 0.500 mL/min.
  • An HP 1100 binary system (Hewlett-Packard, Palo Alto, C A) generates a 20 minute gradient starting with 0% B (acetonitrile) and 100% A (water/0.1% formic acid) at 0.0 to 3.0 minutes, then ramps up to 15% B at 3.5 minutes and runs isocratically until 12.0 minutes. This elution step is followed by a high organic wash step ramping up to 95% B from 12.0 to 14.0 minutes while increasing the flow rate to 0.800 mL/min at 14.1 minutes. At 16.0 to 16.5 minutes the system is resetting to 0% B and re-equilibrates for 3.5 minutes at 0.800 mL/min.
  • a 15 minute gradient is generated starting with 98% A (water/0.1%) formic acid (acetonitrile)) at 0-2.5 minutes, then ramps to 17% B at 2.5 minutes up to 11 minutes, then ramps to 95% B at 11 minutes.
  • the flow rate is increased to 0.800 mL/minute at 11.1 minutes.
  • the LCQ divert valve is set to direct the flow to the detector between 8 and 11 minutes.
  • 10 ⁇ l of each sample is injected using an HP 1100 autosampler (Hewlett-Packard, Palo Alto, CA). Under the first set of conditions, CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] elutes at a retention time of 9.69 minutes.
  • the standard analytes are prepared by adding different levels of CRD- Leu 4 Ile,,Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] and a fixed amount of CRD-L- Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] triacetate salt to rat urine filtrated through a 'Sterile Acrodisc 13 0.2 ⁇ m' filter (Gelman Sciences, Prod. # 4454) or serum.
  • Rat serum samples are analyzed as described above, for fast screens without prior purification, otherwise after liquid/liquid extraction with ice-cold acetonitrile followed by solvent removal in a speed vac over night and reconstitution in water/formic acid (0.1 %) or HPLC grade water.
  • 400 ⁇ l of ice cold acetonitrile is mixed with serum (about 100 ⁇ l) and centrifuged for 10 minutes at 10,000 ⁇ m.
  • 400 ⁇ l of supernatants were transferred into fresh tubes, dried under vacuum and reconstituted in 80 ⁇ l of HPLC grade water. Samples were spun for 10 minutes at 10,000 ⁇ m and 70 ⁇ l transferred into 100 ⁇ l glass inserts in 2 mL HPLC vials for LC-MS analysis.
  • An internal standard such as deuterated CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys I3 peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1] can be added to account for losses during sample preparation. The standard curves are prepared accordingly.
  • Pan-Chemokine Peptide Inhibitors Both human and mouse MCP-1 bind to and positively signal through the human chemokine receptor. Thus, regions of homology between human and murine MCP-1 may represent regions that are involved in binding and/or signaling. Based on an alignment of human and murine MCP-1 sequences, three regions in MCP-1 were identified which were conserved between all the species examined. Three peptides (12-15mers) were prepared which had the greatest sequence homology between the human and mouse MCP-1 sequences (Table 1), and were purified to >95% purity. These peptides were screened for their ability to inhibit hMCP-1 induced THP-1 migration.
  • TGF-beta a non-chemokine, i.e., TGF-beta.
  • the sequences o ⁇ Xenopus laevis TGF-betal and TGF-beta3 and human TGF-betal and TGF-beta3 were compared, and 3 regions (each lOmer) of perfect homology were identified.
  • THP-1 cells were maintained at a density of 4 x 10 5 cells per ml in RPMI-1640 supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum + 20 ⁇ M 2-mercaptoethanol.
  • Chemotaxis was induced in a 96-well disposable chemotaxis chamber fitted with a 5 ⁇ M polycarbonate filter (PVP free, ChemoTX, Neuroprobe Inc., Cabin John). Twenty-nine ⁇ l of chemoattractant (recombinant human chemokine; 50 ng/ml, i.e., 5.9 nM) or control (100 ng/ml TGF ⁇ ) was added to the lower compartment of each well.
  • the framed filter was aligned with the holes in the corner of the filter frame and placed over the wells.
  • Five x 10 4 THP-1 cells in 25 ⁇ l of RPMI-1640 were added to the upper compartment.
  • Peptides were dissolved in Milli Q water and then serially diluted in culture medium. In most cases, the serially diluted peptides were added to the upper compartment of the chemotaxis chamber.
  • the chamber was incubated at 37°C in a humidified atmosphere of 5% CO 2 for 4 hours.
  • a strong agonist i.e., MCP-1
  • peptide 2[MCP-1] having SEQ ID NO:3 a weak agonist, displaces MCP-1 from its receptor.
  • peptide 2[MCP-1] exhibited weak agonist properties, i.e., peptide 2[MCP-1] stimulated chemotaxis.
  • peptide 2(1-15)[SDF 1 ⁇ ] had potent pan-chemokine antagonist properties.
  • ED 50 50% inhibition
  • a typical dose response curve is shown in Figure 2.
  • peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] having SEQ ID NO:l abolished all of the MCP-1 induced THP-1 migration.
  • peptide 1 [MCP- 1 ] having SEQ ID NO:2 was a more efficient inhibitor of MCP- 1 induced chemokine migration that it had been when it was incubated with the cells, inhibiting 48%> of the MCP-1 induced migration at 100 ⁇ M compared to 10% inhibition when peptide 1 [MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:2) was incubated with the cells.
  • Peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) also inhibited other functions of MCP-1, which may be mediated by different combinations of receptors.
  • MCP-1 has been reported to be a weak co-mitogen with 0.5% fetal calf serum for cultured smooth muscle cells. It was found that 100 ⁇ M peptide 3(1-12)[MCP- 1 ] (SEQ ID NO: 1 ) completely abolished the co-mitogenic effect of MCP- 1 for cultured smooth muscle cells, also consistent with the hypothesis that peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) is an MCP-1 receptor antagonist.
  • peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) completely inhibits different responses to MCP-1 in different cell types suggests that peptide 3 may be a general antagonist of all chemokine receptors capable of binding and signaling in response to MCP-1.
  • chemokines included a beta-chemokine (“CC”), MlP-l ⁇ and RANTES, and two alpha-chemokines (“CXC”), IL-8 and SDF-l ⁇ .
  • CC beta-chemokine
  • CXC alpha-chemokines
  • TGF-beta was selected as a migration- inducing agent unrelated to the chemokine family, and as an agent which elicits a biological activity by signaling through identified, unrelated receptors.
  • Peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] inhibited the THP-1 migration induced response to all four of the selected chemokines, with the order of potency: MlP-l ⁇ MCP-1 > SDFl ⁇ ⁇ IL-8 (see Table 2).
  • peptide 1 [MCP-1] did not inhibit migration in response to any of these chemokines by more than 20%, even at 100 ⁇ M (Table 2).
  • Peptide 3 binds to THP-1 cells with an association constant of about 10 ⁇ M.
  • Peptide 1 (SEQ ID NO:2) n.s. n.s.” n.s. n.s. n.s. Peptide 2 (SEQ ID NO:3) n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s. Peptide 3 a (SEQ ID NO: 1) 8 ⁇ 1 8 ⁇ 1 14 ⁇ 1 lO ⁇ O n.s.
  • Peptide 1 (SEQ ID NO:2) n.s.” n.s.” n.s. n.s. n.s. Peptide 2 (SEQ ID NO:3) n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s. Peptide 3 (SEQ ID NO: 1) 112 99 103 107 n.s.
  • Peptide 1 (SEQ ID NO:2) n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s. Peptide 2 (SEQ ID NO:3) 23 n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s. Peptide 3 (SEQ ID NO: 1) 108 120 106 108 n.s. a mean ⁇ SEM of at least three determinations b Peptide 1 caused significant inhibition only when added to the lower compartment n.s.
  • peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] having SEQ ID NO:l (as well as peptide 1 [MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:2) and peptide 2(1-15)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:3)) did not significantly inhibit THP-1 migration induced by TGF-beta even at 100 ⁇ M.
  • SEQ ID NO: 1 is a general (i.e., inhibits all chemokines tested) and specific (i.e., only inhibits chemokines) inhibitor of chemokine signaling.
  • peptide 3(1- 12)[MCP-1] shows weak selectivity for CC chemokines over CXC chemokines, nevertheless, at 100 ⁇ M, peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) inhibits >99% of the migration induced by any of the chemokines of either chemokine family tested (Table 2).
  • peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] blocks all of the receptors which participate in the chemotactic and mitogenic signaling pathways elicited by MCP-1.
  • peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) is an inhibitor of a broad range of pro-inflammatory chemokines which act on a wide range of target cells (smooth muscle cells, THP-1, Jurkat T-cell line and primary human monocytes). Note that in contrast to THP-1 cells, peptide 2(1-15)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:3) inhibition of MCP-1 induced migration of primary human monocytes (20%) was statistically significant (Table 2).
  • Peptide 3(7-12)[MCP-l] (SEQ ID NO:9) was as potent an inhibitor of CC chemokine signaling as peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l), but was noticeably more potent as an inhibitor of CXC chemokines (Table 4).
  • peptide 3(1-6)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:8) was much less potent as an inhibitor than peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l).
  • Peptide 3 (SEQ ID NO: 1) 8 8 14 10 n.s.
  • Peptide 3[3-12] (SEQ ID NO:7) 8 7 9 9 n.s
  • Peptide 3[l-6] (SEQ ID NO:8) 33 25 17 19 n.s.
  • Peptide 3 [7- 12] (SEQ ID NO:9) 7 5 6 6 n.s. Leu 4 peptide 3 (SEQ ID NO: 10) 8 7 3 3 n.s, Ser 7 peptide 3 (SEQ ID NO:l 1) 7 6 3 4 n.s. Ile ⁇ peptide 3 (SEQ ID NO: 13) 6 4 2 7 n.s,
  • Leu 4 Ile u peptide 3 (SEQ ID NO: 14) 2 1 3 3 n.s.
  • WVQ 8 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 n.s. KQK 7 n.s. n.s. n.s. n.s SEE n.s. 6 n.s. n.s. n.s.
  • Peptide 3(7-12)[MCP-l] (SEQ ID NO:9) showed essentially no selectivity, inhibiting migration by all chemokines tested with an ED 50 in the range of 7-9 ⁇ M, i.e., it was a pan-chemokine inhibitor.
  • Peptide 3(1-6)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 8) was much less efficient at inhibiting the CC chemokines (ED 50 of about 30 ⁇ M) but only slightly less efficient at inhibiting CXC chemokines (18 ⁇ M) compared with peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l).
  • the selectivity ratio is defined as the average ED 50 for MCP-1 and MlPl ⁇ divided by the average ED 50 for IL-8 and SDFl ⁇ . Selectivity ratios of greater than 1 indicate greater inhibition of CC chemokines relative to CXC chemokines; selectivity ratios of less than 1 indicate greater inhibition of CXC chemokines relative to CC chemokines; and a selectivity ratio of 1 indicates that both families of cytokines are inhibited to the same extent. Hence, although it is overall a markedly weaker inhibitor of chemokine signaling, peptide 3(1- 6)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 8) showed a 2-fold selectivity for CXC chemokines.
  • peptide 3(1-6)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:8) is a preferred inhibitor of the CXC chemokines, with a selectivity ratio of 0.7
  • peptide 3(7-12)[MCP-l] (SEQ ID NO:9) is a preferred inhibitor of both classes of chemokines, with a selectivity ratio of 1.1.
  • the selectivity ratio for peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) is l.5.
  • Peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] had very similar properties to peptide 3 ( 1 - 12) [MCP- 1 ] (SEQ ID NO : 1 ) .
  • This result suggested that the glutamate (E) and isoleucine (I) residues at positions 1 and 2 of the peptide 3(1- 12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) sequence, which are not conserved in chemokine sequences other than MCP-1, are unimportant for receptor binding.
  • Alignment of all human chemokine sequences in the peptide 3 region indicate a common conserved motif present in almost all chemokines whether of the alpha or beta subfamily (Table 3). This motif is: Cx 1 DPx 2 x 3 x 4 Wx 5 Q.
  • Leu 4 peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 10) showed an approximately 4-fold increase in potency as an inhibitor of CXC chemokines compared with ala-containing peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l), there was no decrease in the potency of CC chemokine inhibition (Table 4).
  • Leu 4 peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 10) showed some CXC selectivity (a selectivity ratio of 0.37) and was the most CXC selective of all the derivatives tested other than the tripeptides (see below).
  • chemokines As noted for position X ! above, only three different amino acids appear at position x 5 (Table 1). Most chemokines have valine (V) at position x 5 as do the CXC chemokines IL-8 and MIP. In contrast, SDF-1 and IP 10 have isoleucine (I) at this position, while ENA78 is the only chemokine with leucine (L) at this position.
  • Leu 4 Ile n peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 14) was approximately 5-fold more potent as an inhibitor of CC chemokines than peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l), or the single mutants Leu 4 peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:10) or He, peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:13).
  • Leu 4 Ile, peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] was a more potent general chemokine inhibitor, with an average ED 50 of 2.3 ⁇ M compared with 10 ⁇ M for peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l).
  • Leu 4 Ile n peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 14) unexpectedly preserved the modest CC selectivity of peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 1) with a selectivity ratio of 2.0.
  • Leu 4 Ile u peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) was approximately 5-fold more potent as an inhibitor of MCP-1 signaling than peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l), despite the fact that peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) contains the cognate sequence from human MCP-1.
  • Leu 4 Ile ⁇ peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] SEQ ID NO:l
  • Leu 4 Ile n pe ⁇ tide 3(1- 12) [MCP-1] SEQ ID NO: 14
  • Ser 7 peptide 3(1- 12)[MCP-1] substitutes the positively charged K residue present in MCP-1, MCP-2, Eotaxin, IL-8 and SDF-1 with the hydroxylated S residue present in MlP-l ⁇ , MlPl ⁇ and RANTES.
  • this alteration did not markedly alter the selectivity.
  • this alteration did not decrease the potency of inhibition of MCP-1 signaling, nor increase the potency of inhibition of MlPl signaling (Table 4).
  • CC selectivity of peptide 3(1- 12)[MCP-1] can be converted to CXC selectivity by mutating A to L at position 4 (x,) or by mutating V to I at position 11 (x 5 ).
  • two variants had greater than 3-fold selectivity for one chemokine over the average ED 50 for all the others, i.e., Ile n peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:13) had weak overall selectivity for IL8 inhibition and Ser 7 Glu 8 Glu 9 peptide 3(1- 12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:12) had weak overall selectivity for MlPl ⁇ .
  • peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] variants varied to a small extent in their ED 50 s and their specificity for either the ⁇ family or ⁇ family of chemokines, nevertheless, they were all similar to peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • the results in Table 6 showed that peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) and peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] variants inhibited migration induced by MCP-1, MlPl ⁇ , IL8 and SDFl ⁇ chemokines to a similar extent.
  • Peptides are generally susceptible to chemical or enzymatic hydrolysis.
  • peptides are not normally bioavailable by the oral route since they are not stable in the acid and proteolytic environment of the stomach.
  • chemical or enzymatic hydrolysis leads to a very short in vivo half-life for peptides.
  • in vitro active agents are modified in a manner that results in a derivative which may be orally bioavailable, have improved pharmacokinetics, and the administration of which may achieve concentrations in blood that inhibit chemokine activity.
  • CCD cyclic-reverse-D
  • CRD peptides are prepared by synthesizing the reverse sequence of the peptide (C-terminal to N- terminal) using the opposite stereoisomer (D-amino acids in place of L amino acids). The resulting peptide is then cyclized via N- and C-terminal cysteine residues.
  • D-amino acids in place of L amino acids
  • These derivatives retain a very similar steric arrangement of atoms to non-CRD peptide, but are not subject to enzymatic hydrolysis.
  • Other derivatives which may exhibit an extended half-life in vivo include thienyl or pyridyl derivatives (e.g., U.S. Patent No. 4,992,463; U.S. Patent No. 5,091,396).
  • peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] was modified according to Jameson et al. (Nature, 2 ⁇ &, 744 (1994)), which yielded CRD-Cys, 3 Leu 4 Ileintuitpeptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] ( Figure 3).
  • CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile 11 pe ⁇ tide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] was also resistant to hydrolysis in vivo and allowed therapeutically useful plasma concentrations to be achieved (> 10 ⁇ M 24 hours after a single intraperitoneal dose of 1 mg of CRD-Cys ⁇ Leu lenpeptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] in 250 ⁇ l saline).
  • Cyclic-reverse D (CRD), linear reverse-D (LRD), cyclic forward L (CFL), and linear forward L (LFL) i.e., the standard form of peptides
  • Leu 4 Ile n peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] was found to be a very potent inhibitor of MCP-1 induced THP-1 migration (ED 50 of about 1-10 nM).
  • This increased potency compared to the parent Leu 4 Ile u peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 14) may reflect increased stability, even in vitro, or it may reflect the increased conformational stability of the peptide.
  • this compound binds to the signaling receptor with the same affinity as native full-length MCP-
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] inhibited or enhanced the proliferation of T or B cells to conconavalin A or tetanus toxoid in culture
  • proliferation of CD4 T cells and B cells was assessed by CFSE-FITC cell labeling.
  • 50 ng of CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12) [MCP-1] inhibited ConA proliferation of CD4 T cells by 50% and 5 ng of CRD- Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12) [MCP-1] reduced ConA proliferation of CD4 T cells by ⁇ 3%.
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] had no effect on proliferation of B cells to tetanus toxoid.
  • Convergence criterion was ⁇ 0.01 Kcal/mol A. A conformation was obtained using this procedure with an energy of about 213.4 kcal/mol.
  • each of the residues except the terminal cysteines forming the disulfide bond was mutated individually from D to L, and the geometry re-optimized, starting with the minimum conformation of the all D peptide.
  • each mutant was first run through the geometry optimization routine, then a molecular dynamics simulation, then another geometry optimization.
  • the resulting mutant peptides were compared to the all-D form by overlaying the disulfide bond and one adjacent atom, and visually assessing the difference between the peptide backbones.
  • the overall conformation was insensitive to change of chirality at positions 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, and 10, but was sensitive to change of chirality at positions 5, 6, and 7.
  • CRD-Cys 13 Leu 4 Ile ⁇ pe ⁇ tide 3(3-12) was synthesized (left panel of Figure 13) and was found to be 1000-fold more potent as an inhibitor of THP-1 migration induced by MCP-1 than the D-ala derivative thereof (right panel of Figure 13).
  • the D-alanine prevents the salt bridge formation between an aspartic acid and lysine residue, and so renders this derivative inactive even at a concentration of 100 ⁇ M.
  • LEU 10 -211.9 The following D-amino acid to L-amino acid changes had a significant impact on the structure of the peptide backbone as assessed by this technique.
  • Red blood cells have a signaling-deficient chemokine receptor or binding protein, termed the Duffy Antigen Receptor for Chemokines (DARC). Although it does not signal, this receptor has a high affinity for chemokines (10 nM) and may play a role in clearing them from the circulation.
  • DARC Duffy Antigen Receptor for Chemokines
  • any chemokine receptor antagonist which has a high affinity for DARC may be sequestered by the huge pool of binding sites on red blood cells, and hence be unavailable to inhibit productive chemokine signaling in other tissues.
  • agonists which bind DARC with high affinity are unavailable to productively signal through specific chemokine receptors.
  • an agent of the invention preferably has some affinity for DARC, since peptides which do not bind to DARC are rapidly cleared at first pass by glomerular filtration.
  • preferred agents have DARC binding (affinity constant) in the range 100 nM to 1 mM, more preferably in the range 1 ⁇ M to 100 ⁇ M and even more preferably in the range of 10 to 100 ⁇ M.
  • the erythrocytes are removed and reconstituted to the original volume with binding medium (PBS + 1 mg/ml fatty acid free BSA, pH 7.4), and centrifuged at 900 x g for 10 minutes. This is repeated four times prior to counting the cell and adjusting the volume to 1 x 10 8 erythrocytes per well in a "v" bottomed microtiter plate.
  • the cells are sedimented for 5 minutes at 670 x g and resuspended in binding medium containing 0.5 nM 125 -I MCP-1 (specific activity 2000 Ci/mmol; Amersham) in the presence of non-labeled MCP-1 or test agent.
  • the cells After binding reached equilibrium (30 minutes at 37 °C), the cells are separated from the unbound label by centrifugation for 5 minutes through a sucrose gradient. Counts associated with the cells are then determined by gamma-counting scintigraphy. In the absence of all peptides, the association constant for I25 I-labeled MCP-1 on human red blood cells was 5.45 nM, a value which is in accord with a previous report. Furthermore, Scatchard analysis confirmed the presence of a single high affinity binding site with 500-1000 copies per cell, consistent with the known properties of DARC. Thus, determination of 125 I-MCP-1 binding to red blood cells in this assay in the presence of various concentrations of the peptide(s) allows the association constant of the peptide for DARC to be accurately estimated.
  • the DARC specificity ratio is also determined.
  • the DARC specificity ratio is defined as the estimated ka for association with DARC divided by the ED 50 for biological activity.
  • a DARC specificity ratio greater than 1 indicates that a peptide associates poorly with DARC and is bioavailable for modulating chemokine signaling, either as an antagonist or agonist.
  • a DARC specificity ratio of about 1 indicates that the peptide binds DARC and the THP-1 signaling receptors with similar affinity. Thus, it may be difficult to achieve biologically active (as a chemokine inhibitor) concentrations of such peptides in vivo without further modifications of the peptide.
  • a DARC specificity ratio less than 1 indicates much higher affinity for DARC than for chemokine signaling receptors.
  • Peptide 1 [MCP- 1 ] (SEQ ID NO:2) (which does not bind to chemokine receptors but functions in a dominant negative fashion) showed no binding to DARC (estimated ka > 100 ⁇ M).
  • the weak agonist peptide 2(1-15)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:3) showed high affinity binding to DARC.
  • the association constant for peptide 2(1-15)[MCP1] (SEQ ID NO:3) for chemokine receptors on THP-1 cells was estimated at 2 ⁇ M using competition binding analysis. However, this peptide had an affinity for DARC of less than 500 nM, also assessed by competition binding analysis, using red blood cells.
  • peptide 2 is a preferred therapeutic agent for the treatment or prevention of malaria (an action requiring DARC inhibition, but not modulation of chemokine signaling).
  • Peptides such as peptide 2(1-15)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:3) which have very high affinity for the DARC receptor, may have strong biological agonist activity in vivo (although they are only weak agonists or neutral agonists in vitro). Moreover, peptide 2, variants and derivatives thereof may be strongly pro- inflammatory in vivo, or strongly exacerbate existing inflammation by preventing DARC from performing the function of binding chemokines. If DARC functions as a sink to remove chemokines from the circulation, then the concentration of chemokines may be markedly increased by the presence of peptide 2.
  • peptide 2 may exacerbate that inflammation, allow the inflammation to persist longer than in the absence of the peptide or otherwise change the qualitative nature of the inflammatory reaction.
  • peptides with a low DARC specificity ratio are useful for the treatment of conditions which require improved immune function, or conditions which are characterized by a pathologically inadequate inflammatory response.
  • MlPl- ⁇ has previously been shown to be the only chemokine which does not bind with significant affinity to DARC.
  • Peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:l) also binds to DARC, although it binds to DARC with only a similar affinity to which it binds to the chemokine receptors (low ⁇ M concentration range).
  • Leu 4 ile u peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 14) had essentially no DARC binding capacity (and at least 20-fold selectivity for receptors on THP-1 cells), while inhibiting MCP1 induced migration at concentrations around 1 ⁇ M.
  • peptide 3 derivatives such as leu 4 ile ⁇ peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO:14) may achieve antagonist properties in vivo.
  • the shorter fragments of peptide 3 [MCP-1] (e.g., peptide 3(7-12)[MCP-
  • CRD-Cys I3 Leu 4 Ile ⁇ peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] inhibited THP-1 cell migration induced by MCP-1, MlPl ⁇ , IL-8, and SDF1, with very similar ED 50 s.
  • CRD-peptide 2(1-15)[MCP-1] has more functional potency, less Duffy binding activity compared with the LFL derivative.
  • LRD peptide 2(1-15)[MCP- 1] had approximately a 100-fold decrease in Duffy binding (25 ⁇ M versus 100 ⁇ M for LFL).
  • An alternative approach to preparing agents that are bioavailable is the preparation of non-peptide analogs of chemokines (see Examples 17-22 below).
  • association constant > 30 ⁇ M
  • association constant 100 nM-1 ⁇ M; number of binding sites is about 150,000 per cell.
  • This agent inhibited THP-1 cell migration induced by MCP-1, MlPl ⁇ , IL-8 and SDFl ⁇ with very similar ED 50 s.
  • PEPTIDE SEQUENCE CC DUFFY AVERAGE
  • KQK (SEQ ID NO:51) > 100 22.34 6 f
  • KLK (SEQ ID NO:28) ⁇ 0.1 n.d. 0.1-10 f
  • Footnotes a 'CC-specificity' is the average inhibitory ED 50 versus SDFl and IL8 divided by average inhibitory ED 50 versus MCP-1 and MlPl ⁇ .
  • b 'Duffy selectivity' is the estimated ka for binding to red blood cells divided by average inhibitory ED 50 versus each of the chemokines (except for peptide 2; see footnote d below).
  • c 'Average ED 50 ' is the average inhibitory ED 50 for inhibition of THP-1 migration induced by each of the chemokines (except for peptide 2; see footnote e below).
  • the 'average ED 30 ' is the estimated ka for binding to THP-1 cells.
  • the 'Duffy selectivity' is calculated as the ka for binding to red blood cells divided by the ka for binding THP1-1 cells.
  • CRD Cyclic reverse-D derivative
  • LRD Linear reverse-D derivative
  • CFL Cyclic derivative of standard L-form peptide
  • Tripeptide Therapeutic Agents of the Invention To determine whether fragments of peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] possessed biological activity, fragments of peptide 3 were prepared. Peptide 3(10-12)[MCP-1], i.e., WVQ was found to be a potent inhibitor of all chemokines tested (Table 6). The amino acid residues at positions 10-12 (WVQ) are conserved in many other chemokines, e.g., MCP-3, MlPl ⁇ , MlPl ⁇ , RANTES, EOTAXIN, and IL8, although SDFl has the sequence WIQ.
  • WVQ inhibited all four of the exemplary chemokines tested, although, unlike peptide 3(1-12)[MCP-1] (SEQ ID NO: 1), it was a more potent inhibitor of all the chemokines other than MCP-1, with ED 50 s around 1 ⁇ M.
  • these tripeptides, WVQ and WIQ, as well as non-peptide analogs based on these tripeptides are pan-specific chemokine inhibitors.
  • WVQ had good DARC selectivity (i.e., selectivity of 10).
  • This agent inhibited THP-1 cell migration induced by MCP-1, but did not inhibit migration induced by MlPl ⁇ , IL-8 or SDFl ⁇ .
  • tripeptides and a dipeptide of random sequence were also tested. None of these significantly inhibited migration induced by any of the chemokines. Thus, the tripeptide KQK was specific for inhibiting MCP-1 activity, showing more than 100-fold specificity for MCP-1 over all the other chemokines tested.
  • the tripeptide was highly specific for its cognate chemokine (> 100-fold specific in each case).
  • SEE the cognate peptide from MlP- ⁇ , showed greater than 100-fold selectivity for MlPl- ⁇ over the other chemokines.
  • KLK was a specific and potent inhibitor of SDFl
  • KEN was a specific and potent inhibitor of IL8. It is envisioned that tripeptides in which a conservative substitution is made may have the same specificity as the native tripeptide. Moreover, the corresponding tripeptides in other chemokines may be specific for their cognate chemokines.
  • a number indicates the percentage inhibition of migration induced by that chemoattractant by that tripeptide at 100 ⁇ M concentration (mean ⁇ range: two experiments). A dash indicates no statistically significant reduction in migration (all combinations of chemoattractant and tripeptide have been tested.
  • the tripeptide WVQ inhibited migration in response to all chemoattractants tested and for this tripeptide the numbers shown are the ED 50 for the inhibition (mean of at least two determinations). Note that none of the tripeptides shown inhibited TGF- ⁇ l induced migration at 100 ⁇ M.
  • the bolded values indicate the inhibition by each peptide of migration, induced by the chemoattractant from which it was derived, i.e., KQK was derived from MCP-1, etc.
  • KQK was derived from MCP-1, etc.
  • a The affinity constant for KQK binding to DARC is 15 ⁇ M.
  • the ED 50 for KQK inhibiting MCP- 1 induced migration is 7 ⁇ M.
  • the affinity constant for WVQ binding to DARC is 2 ⁇ M.
  • a modified LD 50 technique was used to determine the mouse intravenous LD 50 value for CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • the LD 50 11.4 mg/mouse IV, which is 569 mg/kg. This is ten times more than the efficacious dose seen in either the asthma model or the endotoxemia model (see Examples below). Intraperitoneal administration of 11 mg did not result in lethality. Histologically, toxicity was confined to the kidneys and lymphoid tissues.
  • apoptosis of lymphocytes was seen in the spleen and gut-associated lymphoid tissue.
  • the rate limiting toxicity was to the kidney.
  • Acute tubular nephrosis is also seen in patients with massive release of myoglobin or hemoglobin after crush injuries or massive hemolysis.
  • Example 6 Use of a CRD-Peptide of the Invention in a Rat Dermal Inflammation Model
  • LPS lipopolysaccharide
  • MCP-1 MCP-1 -induced dermal inflammation in the rat
  • three different doses of CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] were administered.
  • An inflammatory response was elicited by intradermal injection (ventral abdomen) of either 500 ng MCP-1 or 100 ng MCP-1 along with endotoxin-free phosphate-buffered saline vehicle (as a negative control) and bacterial lipopolysaccharide (LPS; as a positive control).
  • the intradermal sites of agonist injection were collected, bisected and the extent of the inflammatory response was assessed by histopathology and quantitative immunofluorescence (fixed and frozen) (for example, following MCP-1 injection, the number of monocyte/macrophages in the skin was determined using the anti-CD 14 (MCA342 from Serotec; clone ED2) at 3 ⁇ g/ml overnight at 4°C.
  • the second antibody was rat anti-mouse FITC (415-096-100 from Jackson ImmunoResearch) at 28 ⁇ g/ml for 6 hours at room temperature).
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] reduced the number of resident tissue monocyte/macrophages in the site that received PBS alone, and also in untreated skin. This is consistent with a systemic downregulation of monocyte/macrophage recruitment in the 24 hours following a single treatment with CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • MCP-1 is fairly specific as a monocyte/macrophage chemoattractant
  • dermal inj ection of LPS induces recruitment of a broader range of leukocytes, including T- and B-cells and neutrophils.
  • Specific antibodies to rat B-cells (MCA 1432 from Serotec) were used at 10 ⁇ g/ml overnight at 4°C to determine whether CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] affected the recruitment of this leukocyte subpopulation.
  • Secondary antibody was anti- mouse FITC (415-096-100 from Jackson ImmunoResearch, as above).
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] substantially inhibited the recruitment of B-cells to the site of the LPS injection ( Figure 7B).
  • PBS, 50 ng LPS and 500 ng MCP-1 were injected into three separate sites on the ventral abdomen of each rat.
  • Panel A of Figure 14 shows the normal level of monocytes patrolling the rat skin surface.
  • 500 ng of MCP-1 was injected in the rat abdomen, there is a significant increase in monocyte staining (Figure 14, panel B).
  • These levels remain unaltered if treated with PBS or control peptide.
  • the rats when treating the rats with 10 mg of the CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12) the inflammatory response is abolished (panels C and D of Figure 14).
  • Sections from the LPS intradermal site were stained for pro-inflammatory cytokines and cellular infiltrates using quantitative immunofluorescence. Using specific antibodies for neutrophils, monocytes, CD4+ T lymphocytes, and B-lymphocytes, the data showed that the median percentage area stained for each cell type was abolished in each case compared to the PBS and inactive peptide controls ( Figure 15). In addition, when TNF- ⁇ , IL-8 and MCP-1 were measured in the same sections, TNF- ⁇ , IL-8 and MCP-1 were also substantially reduced when rats were treated with the active peptide, a pan-chemokine inhibitor.
  • MCP-1 and other peptide 3 derivatives, analogs and variants are not limited to reducing or inhibiting macrophage (monocyte) accumulation but also inhibit recruitment of other leukocyte subsets, e.g., B cells, neutrophils, and CD4+ T lymphocytes, and inhibited the intra-lesional levels of TNF- ⁇ , IL-8 and MCP-1.
  • Example 7 Use of a CRD-Peptide of the Invention in a Murine Endotoxemia Model
  • a mouse endotoxemia model is used to screen agents of the invention for in vivo functional anti-inflammatory activity in a rapid manner.
  • Female CD-I mice are injected i.p. (ventral abdomen) with 583 ⁇ g LPS.
  • mRNA and protein levels of TNF- ⁇ , IFN- ⁇ , IL-4 and MCP-1 and other markers of the inflammatory response are then determined.
  • the animals were administered one of three different doses of CRD- Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] as an intravenous loading dose and a subcutaneous bolus dose (on dorsum).
  • Levels of serum MCP-1 and liver MCP-1 RNA were elevated in LPS treated animals with no modulation by CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys, 3 peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1].
  • Levels of serum IL-4 and IFN- ⁇ and liver IL-4 RNA were low or undetectable in all animals. Liver IFN- ⁇ RNA was increased in all LPS treated animals. There was a dose dependent decrease in serum TNF- ⁇ in CRD- Leu 4 Ile n Cys I3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] treated animals with statistical significance reached in the high dose group. Liver TNF- ⁇ RNA was high in all LPS treated animals.
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] treated mice may modulate the immune response via alterations in TNF- ⁇ levels.
  • Example 8 Use of a CRD-Peptide of the Invention in Normal Monkeys and Mice, and in a Murine Asthma Model
  • mice were injected intravenously, intravenously and intratracheally, or intratracheally alone with CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1].
  • Mice were sacrificed at 20-24 hours post injection. Lungs were collected for isolation of cells, which were subsequently counted and characterized by surface staining for CD3, CD4, CD8, B220, and Mac-1.
  • the total number of cells isolated from the lungs was higher in all groups receiving a low dose of CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] (0.3 ⁇ g IV and or 10 ⁇ g IT) compared to PBS-treated mice. There were no significant differences in the total number of cells isolated from lungs of mice treated with the high dose CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] compared to PBS controls.
  • mice were sensitized with 0.1 mg of ovalbumin (OVA) in 100 ⁇ l PBS (diluent control) intraperitoneally.
  • OVA ovalbumin
  • mice received an intravenous loading dose (0.3 or 30 ⁇ g) and a subcutaneous depo dose (10 ⁇ g or 1 mg) of the pan-chemokine inhibitor CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 pe ⁇ tide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • mice were challenged with 1% ovalbumin or PBS (diluent control) intratracheally.
  • mice received a second intravenous loading dose (0.3 or 30 ⁇ g) and a subcutaneous dose (10 ⁇ g or 1 mg) of the pan- chemokine inhibitor CRD-Leu lenCys ⁇ peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • a subcutaneous dose 10 ⁇ g or 1 mg
  • mice were challenged with 2% ovalbumin or PBS (diluent control) intratracheally. Mice were sacrificed 3 hours post-ovalbumin challenge on day 21. Lungs were collected for histopathology and for isolation of cells for total cell counts and FACS analysis. PBLs were collected for FACS analysis.
  • mice treated with the high dose CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys !3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] had minimal to no inflammatory infiltrates in the lung, similar to mice treated with PBS alone.
  • Mice that received low dose CRD- Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] also had minimal inflammation compared to mice treated with PBS and OVA.
  • Rare eosinophils were seen only in the PBS OVA group (positive control), which is an expected response to OVA sensitization. IgE levels were significantly higher in mice treated with PBS and OVA compared to all other groups.
  • mice were sensitized with 0.1 mg of ovalbumin or PBS (diluent control) intraperitoneally. Eight days following sensitization, mice received a subcutaneous dose (10.3 ⁇ g, 103 ⁇ g, or 1.03 mg) of the pan-chemokine inhibitor CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • mice Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3 (3 -12) [MCP-1] to reduce OVA-induced pulmonary inflammation.
  • Mice were sensitized with 0.1 mg of ovalbumin or PBS (diluent control) intraperitoneally in the absence of the test agent. Eight days following initial sensitization, mice were treated with either 10.3 ⁇ g or 1.03 mg CRD- Leu 4 Ile u Cys ⁇ 3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l], or 1.03 mg of the inactive D-ala peptide, by the subcutaneous route. These treatments were given daily from day 8 through day 21. On day 8, thirty minutes following treatment, mice were challenged intratracheally with 1% ovalbumin or PBS.
  • mice were challenged intratracheally with 2% ovalbumin or PBS. Mice were sacrificed 3 hours post-ovalbumin challenge, on day 21. Lungs were collected for histopathology, and for isolation of cells for total cell counts and FACS analysis. Bronchalveolar lavage (BAL) was collected for eicosinoid levels. Serum was collected for IgE and IL-4 levels. Spleens were collected for cytokine recall responses.
  • BAL Bronchalveolar lavage
  • mice treated with high dose (1.03 mg) of CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] were significantly (p ⁇ 0.05) reduced in mice treated with high dose (1.03 mg) of CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] as compared to controls ( Figure 40). There was no significant differences in T cell number. Histologically, all mice treated with the high or medium dose CRD- Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] had fewer inflammatory infiltrates in the lung compared to mice that were not treated with the peptide but challenged with OVA (positive control) or treated with the inactive peptide, although the inflammation is reduced, not eliminated. Mice treated with PBS alone had minimal to no inflammation in the lung.
  • mice challenged with OVA had eosinophils in the lung, including those mice treated with CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l].
  • the recall responses of culture splenocytes from the sensitized animals to OVA were performed.
  • Splenocytes from mice treated with CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] produced significantly less IL-4 in response to OVA (as did splenocytes from unsensitized mice) than splenocytes from untreated mice (OVA positive control) or from mice treated with inactive peptide (Figure 40).
  • IgE levels were significantly reduced (p ⁇ 0.05) in mice treated with all doses of CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1] compared to controls ( Figure 41).
  • the inactive peptide significantly reduced (p ⁇ 0.05) thromboxane B2 in the BAL ( Figure 40).
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP- 1] when delivered daily between days 8 and 21, by subcutaneous injection just prior to OVA challenge, reduced the trafficking of macrophages and B cells into the lung following exposure to the antigen OVA. More significantly, CRD- Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3 (3 -12) [MCP-1] reduced IgE antibody levels in the serum, and IL-4 levels in supernatants from spleen recall cultures, which are strongly associated with asthma. IgE responses are dependent on a Th2 cell response, which produces IL-4 and IL-5.
  • mice were treated with a 100 ⁇ g i.v. bolus of CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] or PBS. Thirty minutes following treatment, mice were challenged intratracheally with 2% OVA and sacrificed 3 hours after OVA challenge.
  • mice were injected subcutaneously from day 21 to day 34 with CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3- 12) [MCP-1] or PBS. On day 34 mice were re-challenged intratracheally with either 2% OVA or PBS. Mice were sacrificed 3 hours after challenge.
  • mice Following sacrifice on day 21 or 34, lungs were collected for histopathology and for isolation of cells for total cell counts and identification by FACS analysis. Serum was collected for IgE and IL-4 levels. Spleens were collected for cytokine and antibody recall responses. Mice treated daily with CRD-Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] for
  • mice treated with CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys I3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] had significantly (p ⁇ 0.05) reduced levels of serum IgE compared to positive controls ( Figure 28 and Table 10).
  • OVA no CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] added
  • Complete suppression of antibody production persisted up to 1 week in recall cultures ( Figures 30 A and B; Tables 8 and 11).
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3- 12)[MCP-1] reduced serum IgE antibody levels, and IL-4 levels in supernatants from spleen recall cultures. There was also a striking reduction of total IgG and IgM antibody produced in splenocyte cultures.
  • mice were challenged intradermal with each of the following in a volume of 50 ⁇ l:PBS; 50 ⁇ g antigen; 5 ⁇ g antigen; 0.5 ⁇ g antigen; 500 ng MCP-1; or 50 ng LPS. Serum was collected at 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 4 hours, and 24 hours. Animals were sacrificed 24 hours after CRD-Leu 4 Ile H Cys 13 peptide 3(3- 12) [MCP-1] injection and complete necropsy performed and tissues fixed for histopathology. Fixed and frozen skin samples were harvested for histopathology and immunohistochemistry. Blood, spleen, and lymph node were harvested for assessment of cell function in migration assay, proliferation assay, and antigen specific antibody and cytokine recall.
  • Intradermal injection sites were evaluated histologically, however, there was no inflammatory response to the 2 positive controls (MCP-1 or LPS) so no further analysis was performed on these samples. No clinically significant changes were noted in the hematology results in any animal. No clinically significant changes were noted in the serum chemistry profiles following treatment with CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l]. The levels of CRD-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] in the serum were measured using LC-MS.
  • T lymphocyte recall responses were measured by the assessment of IL-4 production by cells stimulated with ovalbumin.
  • B lymphocyte recall responses were measured by the assessment of immunoglobulin production by cells stimulated with ovalbumin.
  • a chemokine inhibitor has been shown to inhibit recall responses in B and T cells to a known allergen.
  • This is very important in the treatment of allergic disease and is also very important in autoimmune diseases in which aberrant increases in IL-4 or Ig contribute to the pathophysiology, e.g., asthma, contact hypersensitivity, allergic rhinitis, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, as well as diseases that are mediated by aberrant immunoglobulin production or hypergammaglobulinemia, for example, immune-mediated glomerulonephritis, multiple myeloma (particularly patients with Bence Jones proteins (i.e., immunoglobulin in urine), autoimmune hemolytic anemia, myasthenia gravis, Goodpastures syndrome (anti-glomerular basement membrane induced nephritis), autoimmune uveitis, autoimmune thyroiditis, and autoimmune pancreatic islet cell destruction.
  • the agents of the invention may be useful in indications in which an antibody response to an antigen is to be suppressed (e.g., in conjunction with some immunotherapeutic products which have dose-limiting immunogenicity, such as antibody-based products).
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile wrenchCys, 3 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] when delivered IN and subcutaneously, or subcutaneously alone, altered the trafficking of lymphocytes into the lung following exposure to an antigen. More significantly, CRD-Leu lenCys,-. peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] reduced the cellular inflammation in the lung, IgE responses and IL-4 concentration in the serum, which are strongly associated with asthma.
  • Preferred Tripeptides and Analogs Thereof Preferred tripeptides of the invention include KXK peptides, where X is one of the twenty naturally occurring amino acids, e.g., KQK and KLK, as well as peptides having KXK. As described below, KXK peptides are anti- inflammatory by two distinct mechanisms. Some KXK peptides are TGF-beta activators and others are chemokine antagonists, and a subset are both (see Table 11).
  • a direct ELISA- type assay can be used.
  • Recombinant human latent TGF- ⁇ l produced in CHO cells (R&D Systems) was incubated with the test activator.
  • 200 ng of latent TGF- ⁇ l (at 20 ⁇ g/ml) was incubated with test peptide at 100 nM final concentration at 37°C for 90 minutes.
  • the TGF- ⁇ is incubated with the recombinant extracellular domain of the Type II TGF- ⁇ receptor (R2X) which binds only the active and not the latent forms of TGF- ⁇ l (Clin, Chim. Acta. 22 , 11 (1995)).
  • R2X Type II TGF- ⁇ receptor
  • TGF- ⁇ sample is then incubated with the coated and blocked wells for 2 hours at room temperature with shaking. Wells are washed 3 times quickly with Tris-buffered saline containing 0.05% Tween-20 between each incubation. If any of the latent TGF- ⁇ l has been activated by the incubation with test peptide, it is captured by the R2X, while remaining latent TGF- ⁇ l is washed away. Captured active TGF- ⁇ l is then detected by incubation with a suitable detection agent, such as a peroxidase conjugated polyclonal anti-TGF-beta antibody.
  • a suitable detection agent such as a peroxidase conjugated polyclonal anti-TGF-beta antibody.
  • the wells are incubated with 200 ⁇ l of BDA19 chicken anti-TGF- ⁇ l antibody coupled to horseradish peroxidase for 90 minutes at room temperature with shaking. Any bound peroxidase is then detected using a suitable chromogenic substrate (e.g., K-BLUE TMB substrate solution).
  • a suitable chromogenic substrate e.g., K-BLUE TMB substrate solution.
  • the amount of active TGF- ⁇ generated is estimated by interpolation of a standard curve constructed using known amounts of active TGF- ⁇ l (R&D Systems).
  • Chemokine antagonist activity may be determined using the THP-1 transwell migration assay described above in which the peptide is incubated in the top compartment with the cells while a chemokine is used as a chemoattractant in the lower compartment.
  • chemokines were tested: IL-8; SDF-l ⁇ ; MCP-1 and MlPl : pluses in Table 11 indicate that the peptide was active as an inhibitor of migration induced by at least one of these four chemoattractant chemokines.
  • the number of pluses is a qualitative indicating of the activity of each peptide in each assay. A minus indicates no detectable activity in the assay, and n.d. indicates that no attempt to estimate the activity of the given peptide in this assay has been made to date.
  • KFK was as active as RFK (Schultz-Cherry et al.. J. Biol. Chem.. 22Q, 7304 (1995)).
  • other members of the KXK series were also active as TGF- ⁇ activators.
  • the KYK was more active than KFK.
  • KLK and KIK are of particular interest, since these agents are dual-action anti-inflammatory molecules. These tripeptides are specific antagonists of the SDF-l ⁇ receptor CXCR4, and also activate TGF- ⁇ . Thus, KLK, KIK and their analogs and derivatives are therefore likely to be particular useful pharmaceutical agents for the prevention or treatment of a wide range of anti-inflammatory disorders.
  • a pan-chemokine inhibitor for graft eosinophilia, such as that associated with acute transplant rej ection, a pan-chemokine inhibitor, or a selective inhibitor of eosinophil recruitment (such as KICK or an analog thereof), may be particularly beneficial.
  • Such agents may be used alone or in conjunction with lower than normal doses of steroids, such as prednisolone, which are used currently to control acute rejection episodes. Severe side-effects are associated with the use of the highest dose of prednisolone (or other steroids) used during acute rejection, and use of agents which reduce or abolish the need to give steroids would be particularly useful.
  • KYK analogs provide powerful activation of TGF- ⁇ in the absence of chemokine inhibition, while analogs of KLK have both properties.
  • Analogs of KQK have inhibitory action on one or more chemokine receptors but do not activate TGF- ⁇ .
  • KYK, its analogs, and derivatives may be selected for use in diseases where TGF- ⁇ upregulation is particularly beneficial, for example, in atherosclerosis or osteoporosis.
  • analogs of KQK may be selected where chemokine inhibition is desired but TGF- ⁇ upregulation may not be beneficial, for example, in treatment of HIV infection.
  • the KXK peptides, and isosteres thereof, may be useful to treat low bone mineral density, where TGF-beta elevation and selective inhibition of MCP-1 are likely to be especially synergistic.
  • Derivatives or analogs of the KXK class may be used alone or in combination with other therapies for the treatment of inflammatory disorders, or other diseases or indications such as those described herein.
  • derivatives, or analogs of KYK may be used in conjunction with steroids for the treatment of inflammatory conditions, allowing lower than normal doses of steroids to be used reducing the side effects associated with chronic steroid use.
  • conservative substitutions of the amino acids at positions 1 and 3 do not affect the activities of the molecules.
  • one or both of the lysine side chains (either in a peptide or in an analog such as (VI)) may be substituted with an arginyl side chain or an ornithinyl side chain.
  • both chemokine peptide 2 and peptide 3 block binding of the natural chemokine ligands in a competitive manner. However, they do not block binding of one another suggesting that they bind to distinct regions of the receptor and that both of these regions are important for binding of the natural ligand.
  • peptide 2 is further distinguished from peptide 3 in their differential functional activity. Peptide 3 not only binds to the receptor but also blocks the functional activity of receptor signaling as indicated by inhibition of chemotaxis. Peptide 2 does not inhibit chemotaxis.
  • these peptides together are particularly useful in identifying regions of chemokine receptors that are important in different functional activities. Once these regions are identified, they can be used to screen combinatorial libraries or compound banks for specific inhibitors to distinct chemokine functions that may be structurally unrelated to the starting compounds, but are functionally related.
  • chemokines it may be important for chemokines to form dimers to activate the receptor of interest.
  • the peptides of the invention lack the amino terminal domains that are thought to be important for chemokine dimer formation. If dimer formation is required for cell signaling, then the agents of the invention may inhibit activation as they can bind to the receptor but are unable to form dimers, e.g., with native chemokine ligand.
  • Iodinated-RANTES and iodinated-MCP-1 were reconstituted in MilliQ water to a concentration of 50 nM (0.1 ⁇ Ci/ ⁇ l) with a specific activity of 2000 Ci/mmole.
  • Iodinated-streptavidin was obtained (Amersham) at a stock concentration of 47 nM (0.1 ⁇ Ci/ ⁇ l) and a specific activity of 38 ⁇ Ci/ ⁇ g (55,000 Da).
  • Cold RANTES and MCP-1 were purchased from R&D Systems (Minneapolis, MN), reconstituted in sterile PBS + 1 mg/ml fatty acid free BSA (FAF-BSA) (Sigma A-6003) at 10 ⁇ g/ml (1.25 ⁇ M).
  • Cold streptavidin (Calbiochem) was reconstituted in sterile MilliQ to a concentration of 4 mg/ml (90 ⁇ M).
  • FAF-BSA was used throughout. All experiments were performed in binding medium (50 mM HEPES, 1 mM CaCl 2 , 1 mM MgCl 2 , 0.5% FAF-BSA pH 7.5) as described by Ruffing et al. (Cell. Tmmunol.. 182, 160 (1998)) unless stated otherwise. Reactions were all performed at 4°C and all buffers were pre- cooled to 4°C unless stated otherwise.
  • the biotinylated peptide was synthesized as an N-terminal biotin conjugate of the sequence n'-CLDPKQKWIQC-c' (Aff ⁇ niti Research) and confirmed as >90% pure by HPLC. Every molecule has a biotin associated with it.
  • the peptide was reconstituted to 10 mM stock concentration in MilliQ water and stored frozen in small aliquots until required.
  • an N- terminal biotin-labeled derivative of peptide 2(1-15)[MCP-1] was used as a positive control.
  • HOS parental cells and CCRl -5 and CXCR4 transformants were obtained from the AIDS Reagent Program and were maintained as described on the supplier data sheet.
  • chemokine receptor-expressing plasmid was maintained throughout culture.
  • CHO parental cells and CXCR1 and CXCR2 transformants were obtained form Dr. J. Navarro (Southwestern University, TX, USA) and maintained as described by the supplier under constant selection for expression of the chemokine receptor. All cells were split at about a 1 : 10 dilution approximately every 4 days, releasing the cells with EDTA solution and reseeding at known density.
  • cells were released from the flask with EDTA solution and reseeded into 24 or 12 well plates as described at about 2 x 10 5 cells/well (4.4 x 10 4 cells/cm 2 ) 18-24 hours prior to the experiment. At the time of the experiment, all wells were at a nominal density of 3 x 10 5 cells/well. Results
  • the biotinylated peptide was compared to the corresponding unlabeled peptide.
  • the chemokine chemoattractant used was MCP-1 at 100 ng/ml in RPMI 1640 + 10% FCS. Migration was allowed to occur for 4 hours through a 5 ⁇ m filter at 37°C. MCP- 1 as the chemoattractant increased the number of cells migrated by almost three fold, and this was inhibited by the presence of the unlabeled peptide in a dose- dependent fashion. The ED 50 for inhibition was about 9 ⁇ M, consistent with previously reported data for this peptide (2-3 ⁇ M).
  • the labeled peptide also inhibited MCP-1 induced migration, with a similar ED 50 (about 4 ⁇ M) (Figure 20). This experiment was repeated twice, and there was no statistically significant difference between the labeled and unlabeled peptides. Thus, the addition of the label did not infer with the function of the molecule.
  • ELIS A The presence of a biotin moiety in the labeled peptide which was capable of binding streptavidin was confirmed by competition ELIS A. Briefly, streptavidin was coated onto ELIS A plate wells (Nunc Maxisorp plates) at 10 pmoles per well for 45 minutes in 50 mM sodium carbonate pH 8.5 at 4°C. After blocking (5% sucrose/5% Tween 20 in TBS), the plate was incubated with various concentrations of labeled peptide 3 (between 0.1 and 1, 000-fold molar excess over the coated streptavidin) for 1 hour at room temperature.
  • a Scatchard analysis was performed under the conditions determined to represent equilibrium binding.
  • the purpose of this experiment was to estimate the number of high affinity binding sites (CCR5 receptors) on the cell surface, since the full Scatchard analysis is performed under conditions where the binding was limited by availability of binding sites, not by number of molecules RANTES added.
  • the result indicated about 80,000 binding sites per cell on the parental line and about 200,000-400,000 binding sites per cell on the high expressing CCR5 line. Using this information, the conditions necessary to perform a full 12-point Scatchard analysis at equilibrium, limited by binding site number, were calculated.
  • the conditions chosen were 0.03 nM labeled RANTES in 1.25 ml added to 3 x 10 5 cells at 4°C for 2 hours, in the absence or presence of cold RANTES at concentrations between 0.06 and 25 nM (2-fold to 800-fold excess).
  • propensity of these peptide substances to bind to hydrophobic surfaces may also account for much of the variability seen when the experimental protocols are transferred from one site to another (e.g., when different plastic tubes are used to handle the peptide substance).
  • peptide 3 does not bind to human chemokine receptors at any appreciable affinity in vitro under the binding conditions normally used for chemokine receptor interaction studies, as well as under several other binding conditions.
  • peptide 3 interacts with the chemokine receptors by collisional coupling, or by a mechanism with very short residence times.
  • the most likely interpretation of the data is that peptide 3 is a functional chemokine inhibitor by a mechanism other than direct receptor antagonism, e.g., by preventing functional receptor ligand interactions, or by binding to a third component (other than receptor or ligand) which is necessary for ligand function.
  • peptide 3 may bind to a cell surface site/receptor distinct from the known chemokine receptors, bind to extracellular matrix or cell membrane associated components (including, but not limited to, glycosaminoglycans (GAG), e.g., a GAG component of the plasma membrane, glycochalyx, proteoglycans, fibrinogen, chondroitin sulfate, heparin sulfate, keratin sulfate, hyaluronic acid, collagen and sulfated surface moieties), or interfere with signal transduction mechanisms in either a direct or indirect manner.
  • GAG glycosaminoglycans
  • peptide 3 With respect to the binding of peptide 3 to a distinct receptor or to extracellular matrix or cell membrane associated components, once bound, peptide 3 interferes with chemokine activity, but does not dislodge or hinder ligand binding to the cells.
  • the number of binding sites (receptors) for peptide 3 on THP-1 cells was estimated to be 1000 receptors/cell ( Figures 28 and 29).
  • a synthetic photoactivatable derivative may be employed for crosslinker aided purification of the receptor, or a ligand blotting approach may be employed.
  • cell membrane proteins from THP-1 cells (which have the receptor) and from HOS (a human osteosarcoma cell line) cells (which do not have functional receptor) were separated by gel electrophoresis, then incubated with biotin-labeled peptide 3, preferably after renaturation of the proteins (e.g., using a graded decrease in SDS over a period of time) and then detected with streptavidin peroxidase.
  • biotin-labeled peptide 3 preferably after renaturation of the proteins (e.g., using a graded decrease in SDS over a period of time) and then detected with streptavidin peroxidase.
  • a cross linkable affinity probe is synthesized, e.g., biotin-SLDPKQKWIQC-X (L-amino acid forward linear sequence).
  • the purpose of the Ser 0 is to leave only one cys residue in the molecule.
  • a photoactivatable crosslinking group is attached through the sulphahydryl group on the remaining Cys 13 residue, e.g., APDP (N- [4-(p-azidosalicylamido)butyl]-3'-(2'-pyridyldithio)propionamide).
  • APDP N- [4-(p-azidosalicylamido)butyl]-3'-(2'-pyridyldithio)propionamide.
  • THP-1 cells N- [4-(p-azidosalicylamido)butyl]-3'-(2'-pyridyldithio)propionamide
  • TJV light TJV light which induces covalent crosslinking of the APDP group to the receptor.
  • the cells are then disrupted and membrane proteins extracted and denatured.
  • the protein mix is passed onto a streptavidin column.
  • the peptide and the receptor are then released from the streptavidin column either by full denaturation (e.g., with 10 M urea) or by the use of 2-mercaptoethanol, which will uncouple the APDP from the peptide, freeing the receptor.
  • the purified receptor is then identified by N- terminal sequencing methods, or by tandem nanoelectrospray mass spectroscopy. After peptide 3 binds to its receptor, it may block proteins required to effect the response (e.g., block specific integrins needed for chemokine-induced migration but not fMLP or TGFb induced migration), down regulate a chemokine receptor, or interfere with signal transduction mechanisms.
  • Interference with signal transduction mechanisms can be detected in either a direct or indirect manner (for example, using assays for measuring intracellular calcium flux, cAMP, pI3, kinase activity, and DAG).
  • CRD-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] did not block MCP-1 induced calcium flux, but did block SDF-1 induced calcium flux ( Figure 38).
  • the intraluminal thread (ILT) model is representative of clinical ischaemia reperfusion injury, it gives a focal ischemic lesion and is widely used in the pharmaceutical industry to test candidate compounds for neuroprotective efficacy.
  • Fed, male Sprague Dawley rats (Charles Rivers, approximately 330 g) were anaesthetized with 2% halothane in 70/30 % N 2 O/O 2 and the left middle cerebral artery occluded (MCAo) for 90 minutes using the ILT approach.
  • the MCAo is achieved by the placement of a 3/0 nylon suture into the internal carotid artery and advancing it approximately 18 mm from the carotid bifurcation such that its tip is positioned approximately 1 mm beyond the origin of the MCA. After the required ischemic period, the nylon suture is withdrawn into the external carotid artery and the lesion is reperfused from the normal antegrade direction.
  • the ischemic damage was assessed by conventional magnetic resonance imaging (T2, diffusion and proton density sequences) on day 1, 2 and 3 post MCAo.
  • T2 magnetic resonance imaging
  • MRI was performed at 4.7T using a SIS-200 imaging spectrometer (Spectroscopy Imaging Systems, Fremont, CA, USA) and a home-built 75 mm diameter 8-legged birdcage radio frequency coil.
  • 25 contiguous coronal slices starting at the level of the eyes, running rostral to caudal through the brain, were acquired using a 128*128 acquisition matrix covering a field of view of 4*4 cm. Each slice was 0.9 mm thick.
  • Regions 2 and 3 overlap the core of the infarct and more neutrophils were observed in sections in the penumbra regions. This is likely to be because the penumbra region remains fully perfused but the infarcted region is largely necrotic with little or no blood supply. Region 1 is the most penumbral and had the highest neutrophil number.
  • Radiolabeled CRD-L-Leu 4 Ile u Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] peptide (molecular weight about 1360, 2.0 Ci m-mol '1 , 302.3 ⁇ Ci mL "1 in sterile water for injection (SWI)), and non-labeled peptide were prepared.
  • Doses of 100 ⁇ g total peptide and 20 ⁇ Ci of 3 H-CRD-L-Leu 4 Ile n Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l] in 200 ⁇ l of PBS were prepared, taking into account the impact of tritiated peptide mass on the total dose. Each rat was injected i.v.
  • the serum tubes were centrifuged, and the resulting serum (100 ⁇ L) and cell pellet (weighed) were placed onto sample cones for processing by a Model 307 Packard sample oxidizer. The remaining serum was aliquoted and frozen for later analysis.
  • Urine was sampled in time intervals of 0-4, 4-6, 6-10, 10-20, 20-28, 28-48, and 48-72 hours. 100 ⁇ L of each individual urine collection was placed onto sample cones for oxidation, and the remainder frozen for later analysis by HPLC and LC-MS.
  • the rats were anesthetized, exsanguinated by cardiac punctured, euthanized by cervical dislocation, and dissected to estimate the biodistribution of 3 H-CRD-L- Leu 4 Ile ⁇ Cys 13 peptide 3(3-12)[MCP-l]. Processed samples were counted in the Packard. Serum Pharmacokinetics
  • the data indicate a biphasic clearance in both sets of animals.
  • Curve- fitting pharmacokinetic analyses were done using a basic two-compartment biexponential model to the serum data.
  • the actual time and concentration data is entered into a fitting program (PK Analyst, MicroMath Scientific Software. Salt Lake City, UT), and is fitted according to model selection (e.g., i.v. bolus, two- compartment distribution). Calculated concentration values are generated, and a curve is fit to the data.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Virology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Nanotechnology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)

Abstract

La présente invention concerne des peptides de chimiokines isolés et purifiés, leurs variants et dérivés, ainsi que des analogues de ces peptides de chimiokines.
EP00904325A 1999-01-12 2000-01-12 Composes et procedes destines a inhiber ou renforcer une reaction inflammatoire Withdrawn EP1141011A2 (fr)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP10012546.7A EP2386565A3 (fr) 1999-01-12 2000-01-12 Composés et procédés pour inhiber ou augmenter une réponse inflammatoire

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US452406 1989-12-19
US22907199A 1999-01-12 1999-01-12
US229071 1999-01-12
US27119299A 1999-03-17 1999-03-17
US271192 1999-03-17
US09/452,406 US7238711B1 (en) 1999-03-17 1999-12-01 Compounds and methods to inhibit or augment an inflammatory response
PCT/US2000/000821 WO2000042071A2 (fr) 1999-01-12 2000-01-12 Composes et procedes destines a inhiber ou renforcer une reaction inflammatoire

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP1141011A2 true EP1141011A2 (fr) 2001-10-10

Family

ID=27397912

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP00904325A Withdrawn EP1141011A2 (fr) 1999-01-12 2000-01-12 Composes et procedes destines a inhiber ou renforcer une reaction inflammatoire
EP10012546.7A Withdrawn EP2386565A3 (fr) 1999-01-12 2000-01-12 Composés et procédés pour inhiber ou augmenter une réponse inflammatoire

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP10012546.7A Withdrawn EP2386565A3 (fr) 1999-01-12 2000-01-12 Composés et procédés pour inhiber ou augmenter une réponse inflammatoire

Country Status (6)

Country Link
EP (2) EP1141011A2 (fr)
JP (2) JP4712975B2 (fr)
AU (1) AU2610000A (fr)
CA (2) CA2697598A1 (fr)
HK (1) HK1039784A1 (fr)
WO (1) WO2000042071A2 (fr)

Families Citing this family (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2000050088A2 (fr) * 1999-02-22 2000-08-31 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Complexes constitues d'un anticorps et de chimiokines biotinylees
US6869606B1 (en) 1999-02-22 2005-03-22 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Biotinylated-chemokine antibody complexes
EP1343751A2 (fr) 2000-12-20 2003-09-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Derives cycliques en tant que modulateurs de l'activite des recepteurs de chimiokines
JP2005506949A (ja) 2000-12-20 2005-03-10 ブリストル−マイヤーズ・スクイブ・ファーマ・カンパニー ケモカイン受容体の調節剤としてのジアミン
DE102004054421B4 (de) * 2003-11-12 2019-06-27 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Geliermittel für Öl
EP1691814B9 (fr) 2003-12-01 2013-02-20 Cambridge Enterprise Limited Agents anti-inflammatoires
RU2267496C2 (ru) 2004-01-15 2006-01-10 Сергей Иванович Черныш Противоопухолевые и антивирусные пептиды
GB2418426A (en) 2004-08-18 2006-03-29 Univ Cambridge Tech Alpha-(acylamino)-bicyclolactam derivatives for treatment of inflammatory disorders
GB2418427A (en) 2004-09-02 2006-03-29 Univ Cambridge Tech Ligands for G-protein coupled receptors
GB0511060D0 (en) 2005-05-31 2005-07-06 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
GB0512238D0 (en) 2005-06-15 2005-07-27 Univ Cambridge Tech Anti-inflammatory agents
WO2007021807A1 (fr) 2005-08-12 2007-02-22 Schering Corporation Fusions de mcp1
US9012152B2 (en) * 2007-01-09 2015-04-21 Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Anti-bacterial peptides and methods of treating diseases using same
GB2452696B (en) 2007-08-02 2009-09-23 Cambridge Entpr Ltd 3-(2',2'-dimethylpropanoylamino)-tetrahydropyridin-2-one and its use in pharmaceutical compositions
GB2455539B (en) * 2007-12-12 2012-01-18 Cambridge Entpr Ltd Anti-inflammatory compositions and combinations
EP2382231A2 (fr) 2009-01-16 2011-11-02 Sederma Nouveaux composés, notamment des peptides, compositions comprenant ces derniers et leurs utilisations dans les domaines cosmétique et dermopharmaceutique
FR2941232B1 (fr) 2009-01-16 2014-08-08 Sederma Sa Nouveaux peptides, compositions les comprenant et utilisations cosmetiques et dermo-pharmaceutiques.
FR2941231B1 (fr) * 2009-01-16 2016-04-01 Sederma Sa Nouveaux peptides, compositions les comprenant et utilisations cosmetiques et dermo-pharmaceutiques.
US8524217B2 (en) 2010-05-11 2013-09-03 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. MCP1-Ig fusion variants
GB201009603D0 (en) 2010-06-08 2010-07-21 Cambridge Entpr Ltd Anti-inflammatory agent
CN102795977A (zh) * 2012-08-27 2012-11-28 昆明博鸿生物科技有限公司 一种(7z,11z,13e)-十六碳三烯醛的合成方法
WO2014066002A1 (fr) * 2012-10-23 2014-05-01 The Johns Hopkins University Nouveaux médicaments amphiphiles à auto-assemblage et méthodes de synthèse et d'utilisation
WO2014148136A1 (fr) * 2013-03-19 2014-09-25 岐阜市 Composé ayant une activité anti-allergique et son utilisation
ITRM20130199A1 (it) 2013-04-03 2014-10-04 Irbm Science Park S P A Peptidi per uso dermatologico e/o cosmetico
US9657020B2 (en) 2015-01-20 2017-05-23 Xoc Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Ergoline compounds and uses thereof
MX2018011216A (es) 2016-03-16 2019-08-29 H Lee Moffitt Cancer Ct & Res Moléculas pequeñas contra cereblon para mejorar la función efectora de los linfocitos t.
CA3064274A1 (fr) 2017-06-01 2018-12-06 Xoc Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Derives d'ergoline destines a etre utilises en medecine
KR20210032430A (ko) 2018-07-11 2021-03-24 에이치 리 모피트 캔서 센터 앤드 리서어치 인스티튜트 아이엔씨 세레블론-기반 메커니즘에 대한 이량체 면역-조절 화합물
IT202000025423A1 (it) * 2020-10-27 2022-04-27 Ulisse Biomed S P A Uso di proteine per il trattamento di patologie associate a tossine formanti pori o a proteine virali
WO2022232885A1 (fr) * 2021-05-07 2022-11-10 Lateral Pharma Pty Ltd Compositions pour le traitement d'une maladie inflammatoire des voies respiratoires et leurs utilisations

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR1451176A (fr) * 1962-01-11 1966-01-07 Procédé de préparation de dérivés de l'acide nicotinique des acides alpha-amino-carboxyliques

Family Cites Families (61)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2857386A (en) * 1956-04-09 1958-10-21 Ciba Pharm Prod Inc Iso reserpic and iso deserpidic acids, salts and esters
US3119819A (en) * 1959-07-29 1964-01-28 Ciba Geigy Corp Intermediates for 18-o-alkyl-reserpic acid esters and related compounds
US3291800A (en) * 1963-07-23 1966-12-13 Warner Lambert Pharmaceutical 3-substituted derivatives of yohimbane alkaloids and process for their production
US3264303A (en) * 1964-04-06 1966-08-02 Ciba Geigy Corp Process for the manufacture of yohimbane-18-omicron-ethers
US4093709A (en) 1975-01-28 1978-06-06 Alza Corporation Drug delivery devices manufactured from poly(orthoesters) and poly(orthocarbonates)
US4051842A (en) 1975-09-15 1977-10-04 International Medical Corporation Electrode and interfacing pad for electrical physiological systems
HU172479B (hu) * 1976-03-09 1978-09-28 Gyogyszerkutato Intezet Sposob poluchenija novykh soedinenij s ehrgolenovymi i
DE2626348C3 (de) 1976-06-11 1980-01-31 Siemens Ag, 1000 Berlin Und 8000 Muenchen Implantierbare Dosiereinrichtung
NO812612L (no) 1980-08-06 1982-02-08 Ferring Pharma Ltd Enzym-inhibitorer.
US4383529A (en) 1980-11-03 1983-05-17 Wescor, Inc. Iontophoretic electrode device, method and gel insert
US4675189A (en) 1980-11-18 1987-06-23 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. Microencapsulation of water soluble active polypeptides
US4525359A (en) * 1982-12-10 1985-06-25 Greenway Frank L Iii Treatment for selective weight control
US5120526A (en) 1985-01-14 1992-06-09 Neorx Corporation Method of producing metal radionuclide labeled proteins for diagnosis and therapy
US5175343A (en) 1985-01-14 1992-12-29 Neorx Corporation Metal radionuclide labeled proteins for diagnosis and therapy
US4897255A (en) 1985-01-14 1990-01-30 Neorx Corporation Metal radionuclide labeled proteins for diagnosis and therapy
JPS62501502A (ja) * 1985-01-18 1987-06-18 イミユーンテツク・フアーマシユーテイカルズ 免疫調節性ペプチド
EP0215805A1 (fr) * 1985-01-18 1987-04-01 MERCK PATENT GmbH Peptides de regulation immunitaire
US4683195A (en) 1986-01-30 1987-07-28 Cetus Corporation Process for amplifying, detecting, and/or-cloning nucleic acid sequences
US5045303A (en) 1985-05-17 1991-09-03 Neorx Corporation Radiohalogenated small molecules for protein labeling
US4877868A (en) 1986-03-12 1989-10-31 Neorx Corporation Radionuclide antibody coupling
US5560922A (en) 1986-05-30 1996-10-01 Rutgers, The State University Of New Jersey Transdermal absorption dosage unit using a polyacrylate adhesive polymer and process
US4879225A (en) 1986-06-20 1989-11-07 Neorx Corporation Enhanced production of antibodies utilizing insolubilized immune complexes
US4863713A (en) 1986-06-23 1989-09-05 The Board Of Trustees Of Leland Stanford Jr. Univ. Method and system for administering therapeutic and diagnostic agents
US5202118A (en) 1987-12-18 1993-04-13 Immunex Corporation Method for promoting wound healing using IL-1
US4992463A (en) 1988-07-20 1991-02-12 Monsanto Company Thienyl peptide mimetic compounds which are useful in inhibiting platelet aggregation
US5091396A (en) 1988-07-20 1992-02-25 Monsanto Co. Pyridyl peptide mimetic compounds which are useful platelet-aggregation inhibitors
GB8823869D0 (en) 1988-10-12 1988-11-16 Medical Res Council Production of antibodies
US5028594A (en) * 1988-12-27 1991-07-02 Naxcor Use of photodynamic compositions for cytotoxic effects
US5703055A (en) 1989-03-21 1997-12-30 Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation Generation of antibodies through lipid mediated DNA delivery
US5580774A (en) 1989-07-31 1996-12-03 Eli Lilly And Company Chimeric antibodies directed against a human glycoprotein antigen
US5661132A (en) 1989-12-14 1997-08-26 Auragen, Inc. Wound healing
ATE158021T1 (de) 1990-08-29 1997-09-15 Genpharm Int Produktion und nützung nicht-menschliche transgentiere zur produktion heterologe antikörper
US5625126A (en) 1990-08-29 1997-04-29 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5545806A (en) 1990-08-29 1996-08-13 Genpharm International, Inc. Ransgenic non-human animals for producing heterologous antibodies
US5650150A (en) 1990-11-09 1997-07-22 Gillies; Stephen D. Recombinant antibody cytokine fusion proteins
US5824647A (en) * 1990-12-12 1998-10-20 Postlethwaite; Arnold E. Chemotactic wound healing peptides
US5202169A (en) 1991-01-23 1993-04-13 Spendlove Max J Releasable fastener, method of releasably fastening, and releasable fastener dispenser
WO1993002556A1 (fr) 1991-07-26 1993-02-18 University Of Rochester Therapie du cancer faisant appel a des cellules malignes
US5326752A (en) * 1991-11-27 1994-07-05 Glycomed Incorporated Substituted lactose and lactosamine derivatives as cell adhesion inhibitors
US5608060A (en) 1992-06-09 1997-03-04 Neorx Corporation Biotinidase-resistant biotin-DOTA conjugates
US5616690A (en) 1992-06-09 1997-04-01 Neorx Corporation Hexose derivatized human serum albumin clearing agents
US5578287A (en) 1992-06-09 1996-11-26 Neorx Corporation Three-step pretargeting methods using improved biotin-active agent
US5624896A (en) 1992-06-09 1997-04-29 Neorx Corporation Clearing agents useful in pretargeting methods
DE69424940T2 (de) 1993-06-29 2000-12-28 Ferring B.V., Hoofdorp Synthese zyklischer peptide
EP0716609B1 (fr) * 1993-08-13 2005-12-28 The Uab Research Foundation Procedes et compositions utiles pour stimuler et inhiber l'activite du facteur de croissance transformant de type beta
US5459128A (en) * 1993-11-12 1995-10-17 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute Human monocyte chemoattractant protein-1 (MCP-1) derivatives
CA2178477A1 (fr) 1993-12-07 1995-06-15 Louis J. Theodore Procede et composes permettant un ciblage prealable
US5708163A (en) 1994-03-15 1998-01-13 Sloan-Kettering Institute Of Cancer Research Synthesis of the breast tumor-associated antigen defined by monoclonalantibody MBRL and uses thereof
US6303120B1 (en) 1994-03-15 2001-10-16 Memorial Sloan-Kettering Institute For Cancer Research Synthesis of glycoconjugates of the lewis y epitope and uses thereof
JP3447809B2 (ja) * 1994-07-12 2003-09-16 花王株式会社 浴用剤
AU5528996A (en) * 1995-03-22 1996-10-08 Eli Lilly And Company Methods of treating or preventing pain or nociception
AU6277396A (en) 1995-06-07 1996-12-30 Neorx Corporation Prevention and treatment of cardiovascular pathologies with tamoxifen analogues
US6265184B1 (en) 1995-12-20 2001-07-24 Icos Corporation Polynucleotides encoding chemokine receptor 88C
WO1997029192A1 (fr) 1996-02-12 1997-08-14 Schering Corporation Reactifs constitues d'une chemokine de cellules dendritiques de mammiferes
US5667894A (en) 1996-06-05 1997-09-16 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Cathodic electrocoating compositions containing methane sulfonic acid as a neutralizing agent
GB9617923D0 (en) 1996-08-28 1996-10-09 Smithkline Beecham Plc Novel receptor
US5848956A (en) 1997-03-18 1998-12-15 Grettner; Norman L. Multi-purpose lat sling
US6214540B1 (en) * 1997-03-26 2001-04-10 University Of Maryland Biotechnology Institute Chemokines that inhibit immunodeficiency virus infection and methods based thereon
WO1998054326A1 (fr) 1997-05-29 1998-12-03 Zymogenetics, Inc. Chemokine humaine zchemo-8
US6989435B2 (en) * 1997-09-11 2006-01-24 Cambridge University Technical Services Ltd. Compounds and methods to inhibit or augment an inflammatory response
US5807482A (en) * 1997-10-31 1998-09-15 Uop Llc Chiral stationary phase based on yohimbinic acid

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR1451176A (fr) * 1962-01-11 1966-01-07 Procédé de préparation de dérivés de l'acide nicotinique des acides alpha-amino-carboxyliques

Non-Patent Citations (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ALAN R BATTERSBY ET AL: "Studies on specific chemical fission of peptide links. Part I. The rearrangement of aspartyl and glutamyl peptides", JOURNAL OF THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY, CHEMICAL SOCIETY, LETCHWORTH; GB, 1 January 1955 (1955-01-01), pages 259 - 263, XP009112952, ISSN: 0368-1769, DOI: 10.1039/JR9550000259 *
BAVETSIAS, VASSILIOS ET AL: "Folate-based inhibitors of thymidylate synthase: synthesis and antitumor activity of .gamma.-linked sterically hindered dipeptide analogs of 2-desamino-2-methyl-N10-propargyl-5,8-dideazafolic acid (ICI 198583)", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY ( 1997 ), 40(10), 1495 1510 CODEN: JMCMAR; ISSN: 0022-2623 *
CHRISTIAN LESCHKE ET AL: "Alkyl-Substituted Amino Acid Amides and Analogous Di- and Triamines: New Non-Peptide G Protein Activators +", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 40, no. 19, 1 September 1997 (1997-09-01), pages 3130 - 3139, XP055060708, ISSN: 0022-2623, DOI: 10.1021/jm9703092 *
DENIS, JEAN-NOEL ET AL: "Synthesis of D-albizziine derivatives from L-serine", SYNTHETIC COMMUNICATIONS , 27(13), 2345 -2350 CODEN: SYNCAV; ISSN: 0039-7911, 1997 *
FALCO E A ET AL: "Studies on Condensed Pyrimidine Systems. IV. Some Thiazolo[5,4-d]pyrimidines", JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, ACS PUBLICATIONS, US, vol. 72, 1 May 1950 (1950-05-01), pages 3203 - 3205, XP002082828, ISSN: 0002-7863, DOI: 10.1021/JA01163A112 *
K. PFISTER ET AL, JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, vol. 77, no. 3, 5 February 1955 (1955-02-05), pages 697 - 700, XP055060683, ISSN: 0002-7863, DOI: 10.1021/ja01608a045 *
KATSUHIRO IMAKI ET AL: "A Convenient Preparation of N-Acylpyroglutamic Acid", CHEMICAL AND PHARMACEUTICAL BULLETIN, PHARMACEUTICAL SOCIETY OF JAPAN, JP, vol. 29, no. 9, 1 January 1981 (1981-01-01), pages 2699 - 2701, XP009169077, ISSN: 0009-2363 *
LEANZA, W. J. ET AL: "The 3-hydroxy-DL-glutamic acids", JOURNAL OF BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY , 201, 377 -83 CODEN: JBCHA3; ISSN: 0021-9258, 1953 *
MICHINORI WAKI ET AL: "A Facile Synthesis of N 2 -Protected L-2,3-Diaminopropanoic Acid", SYNTHESIS, vol. 1981, no. 04, 1 January 1981 (1981-01-01), pages 266 - 268, XP055060625, ISSN: 0039-7881, DOI: 10.1055/s-1981-29407 *
MILLER, MARVIN J. ET AL: "The chemistry of a method for the determination of carboxyl-terminal residues in peptides", JOURNAL OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY ( 1977 ), 42(10), 1750 -61 CODEN: JOCEAH; ISSN: 0022-3263 *
NOYER M ET AL: "THE NOVEL ANTIEPILEPTIC DRUG LEVETIRACETAM (UCB L059) APPEARS TO ACT VIA A SPECIFIC BINDING SITE IN CNS MEMBRANES", EUROPEAN JOURNAL OF PHARMACOLOGY, ELSEVIER SCIENCE, NL, vol. 286, no. 2, 1 January 1995 (1995-01-01), pages 137 - 146, XP002295740, ISSN: 0014-2999, DOI: 10.1016/0014-2999(95)00436-O *
See also references of WO0042071A3 *
SHEEHAN J C ET AL: "THE STRUCTURE OF HYDROXYLYSINE", JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, ACS PUBLICATIONS, US, vol. 72, 1 June 1950 (1950-06-01), pages 2469 - 2472, XP000673068, ISSN: 0002-7863, DOI: 10.1021/JA01162A031 *
V. DAFFE ET AL: "Enantiomeric enrichment in the hydrolysis of oxazolones catalyzed by cyclodextrins or proteolytic enzymes", JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, vol. 102, no. 10, 1 May 1980 (1980-05-01), pages 3601 - 3605, XP055060782, ISSN: 0002-7863, DOI: 10.1021/ja00530a047 *
WOLFGANG HARTWIG ET AL: "Enantioselective Synthesis of 2,3-Diamino Acids by the Bislactim Ether Method", SYNTHESIS, vol. 1991, no. 11, 1 January 1991 (1991-01-01), pages 939 - 941, XP055060635, ISSN: 0039-7881, DOI: 10.1055/s-1991-26612 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2363067C (fr) 2012-03-20
JP5351078B2 (ja) 2013-11-27
AU2610000A (en) 2000-08-01
WO2000042071A3 (fr) 2001-05-31
EP2386565A2 (fr) 2011-11-16
HK1039784A1 (zh) 2002-05-10
CA2697598A1 (fr) 2000-07-20
JP4712975B2 (ja) 2011-06-29
JP2010174018A (ja) 2010-08-12
JP2005506947A (ja) 2005-03-10
WO2000042071A2 (fr) 2000-07-20
EP2386565A3 (fr) 2013-11-20
CA2363067A1 (fr) 2000-07-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8481558B2 (en) Compounds to inhibit or augment an inflammatory response
CA2363067C (fr) Composes et procedes destines a inhiber ou renforcer une reaction inflammatoire
EP1012187B1 (fr) Peptides de chemokines, variants, derives et analogues. leur utilisation dans des procedes pour inhiber ou renforcer une reaction inflammatoire
US7291332B2 (en) Inflammatory mediator antagonists
EP0536322A1 (fr) PROTEINE 2$g(a) INFLAMMATOIRE PRODUITE PAR LES MACROPHAGES HUMAINS
BG107685A (bg) Хемокинови мутанти за лечение на мултиплена склероза
IE66227B1 (en) Human macrophage inflammatory protein 2-beta
US7067117B1 (en) Compounds and methods to inhibit or augment an inflammatory response
Haringman et al. Targeting cellular adhesion molecules, chemokines and chemokine receptors in rheumatoid arthritis
US20060148696A1 (en) Protozoan derived compositions and methods for treating autoimmune disease
WO2010086426A1 (fr) Mutants de mcp-1 antagonistes des glycosaminoglycanes et leurs procédés d'utilisation

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20010801

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LI LU MC NL PT SE

AX Request for extension of the european patent

Free format text: AL PAYMENT 20010801;LT PAYMENT 20010801;LV PAYMENT 20010801;MK PAYMENT 20010801;RO PAYMENT 20010801;SI PAYMENT 20010801

RAP1 Party data changed (applicant data changed or rights of an application transferred)

Owner name: CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY TECHNICAL SERVICES LIMITED

RIN1 Information on inventor provided before grant (corrected)

Inventor name: TATALICK, LAUREN MARIE

Inventor name: KANALY, SUZANNE T.

Inventor name: GRAINGER, DAVID J.

17Q First examination report despatched

Effective date: 20020705

RAP1 Party data changed (applicant data changed or rights of an application transferred)

Owner name: CAMBRIDGE ENTERPRISE LIMITED

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION IS DEEMED TO BE WITHDRAWN

18D Application deemed to be withdrawn

Effective date: 20131203

REG Reference to a national code

Ref country code: HK

Ref legal event code: WD

Ref document number: 1039784

Country of ref document: HK